JP2018000821A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To properly execute a freeze when an advantageous section is finished.SOLUTION: The slot machine comprises, as game sections, a normal section in which an instruction function actuation game (game having an advantageous operation mode of stop switch, and actuating an instruction function for displaying advantageous operation mode) is not executed, and an advantageous section in which the instruction function actuation game can be executed. When a shift condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, a section shifts to the advantageous section. As finish conditions of the advantageous section, at least two kinds of conditions, namely, a first finish condition (AT finish condition) and a second finish condition (CZ finish condition) are provided. The advantageous section of the first finish condition has an expectation for a profit obtained in the advantageous section, which is larger than that of the advantageous section of the second finish condition. When the advantageous section is finished with the second finish condition, a freeze is not executed, and when the advantageous section is finished with the first finish condition, a freeze is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.

  In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-161344 A

Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to perform a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, even if the freezing is executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to appropriately perform freezing at the end of the advantageous section.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 26 among the initial inventions 1 to 26 described later.
The invention of claim 1 (fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, it has an advantageous section that can execute the instruction function operation game,
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section
There are at least two types of first end condition and second end condition as the end condition of the advantageous section,
The advantage interval of the first end condition has a larger expected value of profits obtained during the advantage interval than the advantage interval of the second end condition,
Freeze control means for controlling the freeze to temporarily stop the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section with the second ending condition (CZ ending condition), and freezes when ending the advantageous section with the first ending condition (AT ending condition). It is characterized by being executed.
The invention of claim 2 is the invention according to claim 1,
During the freeze, a display relating to profits obtained during the advantageous section is performed.

  According to the present invention, the freeze is executed according to the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous interval (when the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous interval is large) and the freeze is not executed (advantageous interval). In the case where the expected value of profit obtained is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous section.

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows storage number display LED, advantageous area display LED, acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line, etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a pressing order instruction number, an advantageous pressing order, and display content. It is a figure which shows a production group number table. It is a figure explaining transfer of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of advantageous area display LED. It is a timing chart (example 1 and example 2) which shows the flow of processing of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (example 3 and example 4) which shows the flow of processing of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the notification of the pushing order instruction | indication information by acquisition number display LED, and the alerting | reporting of the correct answer pushing order by an image display apparatus. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding an advantageous area and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding the total payout number. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding the number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding the payout number at the time of an accessory operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram (modification example) showing a storage area relating to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process which updates the game frequency etc. using a register | resistor. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 1 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 2 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process which updates the number of games etc., without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the calculation process of an advantageous area ratio. It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. 2 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 3) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 4) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 5) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 6) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 7) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 8) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 9) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 10) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image display example (Example 1-Example 4) of the image display apparatus by a sub control board regarding the addition in AT (3rd Embodiment). In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure explaining the increase in the number of AT games, the change of production, etc. It is a time chart (example 1 and example 2) of an external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a time chart (example 3) of the external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in Example 1 of 5th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between RT transfer and AT. It is a figure which shows Example 2 ((a)-(c)) of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of replay D group drawn by RT3, a winning combination, and a pushing order, and a display combination. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 4 and Example 5 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 and Example 4 of 11th Embodiment. In a 12th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows an ending effect etc. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) of 13th Embodiment. In a 14th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows extension of an advantageous section. In 15th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between an advantageous area and a freeze.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type (number) of condition devices (1BB, replays, small roles) to be drawn and their winning probabilities are unique lottery states, and “RT transition” By shifting from RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be a lottery varies. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same between one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, the combined value of the replay winning probability may be the same for one RT and the other RT.

In this embodiment, RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 (FIG. 22 described later).
“Non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, “RT” includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-inside is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the inside is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be selected for lottery and the winning probability differ between non-inside and inside.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation | movement and 1BBB operation | movement are provided as RT in special game. In the present embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed in both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The “combination” refers to a lottery target. In the present embodiment, a condition device is selected, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (has at least one winning combination).

The lottery condition devices include a “combination condition device” including any of “special roles (combines)” and a “winning and replay condition device” including either a small role or a replay. .
The “object condition device” includes any special combination. SB (Single Bonus; Regular Bonus), CB (Type 2 Special Bonus; Challenge Bonus), SB (Single Bonus; Regular Bonus), which is a device that facilitates winning of small roles when a special role wins, 1BB (first type accessory continuous operation device; first type big bonus) and 2BB (second type accessory continuous operation device; second type big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-type accessory continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the first-type special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the second-type accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the second-type special accessory (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or the two games are satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
In the present embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the “winning and replay condition device” includes either a small role or a replay that does not carry the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the “object condition device” includes RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, and SB and CB that do not carry the winning information after the next game. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry the winning information after the next game is provided.

When winning information is selected for an equipment condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over from the next game onwards, the winning information for special roles until the combination of symbols corresponding to that special role stops on the active line. Is carried over to the next game.
A game in which winning information is not won by the equipment condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game is referred to as “non-inside”. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols for the special feature that has been elected is not yet stopped on the active line, that is, the game carrying the special feature's winning information is `` inside ''That's it. In the present embodiment, the game won in the accessory condition device is included in “non-inside”, but the game won in the accessory condition device may be included in “inside”.

  The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a winning combination with a large number of payouts is won in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage is caused in the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the active line) by the operation mode of the stop switch, Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT is awarded. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The “operation mode” is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switches and / or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
In the present embodiment, the “game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch” is a game in which a push order bell (small role B group, small role C group) is won, duplicate replay (replay B group, replay C group). ) Equivalent to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, at the time of pushing order bell winning, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pushing order is the high-order bell (the number of payouts of the double winning bell group (small role group) is In some cases, a combination of symbols such as the most small combinations is displayed as a bell (small combination) that is most advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, there are cases where the Anme Bell wins and cases where the combination is missed according to the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop appearance (a combination of symbols on the active line; also referred to as “spilled eyes”) displayed when the role is missed is referred to as “pattern symbols” in the present embodiment, and has pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, in the case of replay overlap winning (replay B group, replay C group winning), different symbol combinations are stopped and displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switches, but no overshoot occurs in the replay winning ("PB = 1" described later) ").
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher replay winning probability, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols that maintain an RT with a high replay winning probability is displayed as `` correct answer ''. This is referred to as “push order” or “promotion push order”.
On the other hand, a push order in which a combination of symbols transitioning from an RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, RT having a high replay winning probability) to an unfavorable RT (for example, RT having a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed is “incorrect This is referred to as “push order” or “fall (downgrade) push order”.

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-described “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, the “instruction function” refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates the winning of a small role, the “instruction function” displays the correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (high eye bell) when winning the pressing order bell. In other words, it is not included to display the correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay (a replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or a replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of duplicate replay winning.

In the following embodiment, “instruction function” refers to a function that displays “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and “operation of the instruction function” displays the correct answer push order when the push order bell is won. , And displaying the correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay at the time of replay overlap win.
It is “display” to show the contents of the “instruction” to the player, and “notification” to notify the player of the instruction content. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
Further, “instruction” is a concept having the meaning of “instruction”, but no penalty is imposed on the player just because the “instruction” is not followed. However, if the correct answer pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the high-order bell may not win when the pressing bell wins, or an unfavorable replay may win when the replay overlap wins.

In addition, “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (small role B group, small role C group, replay B group, replay C A game that activates an instruction function in a game that is won by the group). Therefore, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantage section”.
First, the “normal section” is a signal related to an instruction function, specifically a push order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later is a peripheral board (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).
In the normal section, the instruction function must not be operated, so that the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to a sub-control board described later.

In the normal section, when the transition determination to the advantageous section is performed, it is necessary to perform the transition determination in association (correlation) with the selected condition device.
Here, the decision to move to the advantageous section in association with the elected condition device means that when determining whether or not to move to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device, and that the specific condition device has been won And a case where a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section is separately performed.

  In this embodiment, it is set so as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device. In addition, the length (the number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (win) depends on the selected condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning 1BB, which will be described later, when the initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game, it becomes the advantageous section of 50 games, and when the small role E1 is elected alone When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, there is a case where it becomes an advantageous section that only executes one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group). is there.

Furthermore, in determining the transition to the advantageous section in association with the selected condition device, a conditional device that can be determined to transition to the advantageous section (separately, when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous section) The condition device that is a condition for performing the lottery is set so that it is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability.
Here, the “set value” determines the player's degree of advantage. The higher the set value (or the lower the set value), the more advantageous to the player (so that the expected value of the game is higher). ) Is set. For example, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided.
The “condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability (common setting)” refers to a condition device having the same winning probability in all settings.

  In addition, it is only `` possible '' to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, and at the time of winning the conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability This does not mean that it is always necessary to make a transition to an advantageous section, or that a lottery to make a transition to an advantageous section must always be performed. Of course, it is possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when a condition device that does not have a setting difference in winning probability is won.

  On the other hand, the “conditional device having a setting difference in the winning probability (by setting)” indicates that the winning probabilities are not all the same. For example, in addition to the case where the winning probabilities are different for all setting values, the winning probabilities for some setting values are different from the winning probabilities for some other setting values (for example, winning probabilities for setting 1 to setting 5) Is “x” and the winning probability of setting 6 is “y (≠ x)”).

In addition, the “advantageous section” is a gaming section having a performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (an advantageous operation mode) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board. A game in an advantageous section may be referred to as a notification-enabled game. On the other hand, a game in the normal section or a game in the standby section may be referred to as a non-notifiable game.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an instruction content that the main control board performs or an effect contrary to the received signal related to the instruction function.

  In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not in operation) that can execute the instruction function operation game can be obtained. At least one or more games instruct the operating mode of the stop switch for winning the winning combination (small winning role 01) for the maximum payout number in a game selected as a condition device (small role B group) having an advantageous operating aspect It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small combination B group and a small combination C group are provided as so-called push order bell condition devices.
In the small combination B group, a small combination 01 which is a nine-piece combination always wins when the pressing order is correct, and a single combination can be won (may be missed) when the pressing order is incorrect.
On the other hand, in the small combination C group, a small combination 02 which is a three-piece combination always wins when the pressing order is correct, and a single combination always wins when the pressing order is incorrect.

The game when the instruction function operation game is executed is when the accessory is not operated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is “3”.
Further, when the specified number is “3”, the maximum payout number is “9” (at the time of winning the small role 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, the correct pressing order for winning the small role 01 is determined by operating the instruction function when the condition device (small role B group) that allows the small role 01 to win is activated. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

In addition, during an advantageous section, in a game won by a condition device having an advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is won by the condition device having an advantageous operation mode during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the “standby section” refers to a gaming section when it has not yet shifted to the advantageous section after it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal zone may be shifted to the advantageous zone, the normal zone may be shifted to the standby zone, and the standby zone may be further transferred to the advantageous zone. It should be noted that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and always shift to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The waiting section can be transferred only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can carry the winning information after the next game and corresponds to the special combination. A game with a combination of symbols must be finished. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
In the standby section, the instruction function cannot be operated on the main control board, and a signal related to the instruction function cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, the condition is that it is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, when one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group) is executed, and when a predetermined number of games are executed Have
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are executed, when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
The condition for ending the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above but, for example, to perform an end (punk) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when the lottery is won. May be.

Alternatively, only by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and whether or not the instruction function operation game is executed is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery or the like) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is determined in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point (limiter ), Shift to normal section.

  In addition, when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the condition device (group B) having an advantageous operation mode that can obtain the maximum payout number (“9”) has not been won or won However, even if the position related to the maximum payout number (small role 01) has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch to win, the advantageous section is always ended at that time (limiter operation), Transition to the section.

As mentioned above, although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in the present embodiment is defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even when it is determined simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device) must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference. In other words, the transition probability to the advantageous section should not be different depending on the set value.
b) The set value should not be referred to in the advantageous lot addition lottery (even if the lottery is determined without lottery). When an advantageous section is added based on the selected condition device, it must be linked to a condition device with no setting difference.

c) Special part in the regular section (meaning a special part that carries over the winning. The same applies in this paragraph.) During the inside or during the special part in operation, the lottery of the advantageous section (may be determined at the same time as the lottery of the conditional equipment ) Must not be performed. In addition, during the special role, even if it is in the advantageous section, it is not allowed to carry out the lottery (which may be decided without performing the lottery) on the advantageous section. Furthermore, if a conditional device having a setting difference that includes a special combination in an advantageous section is elected and the special combination is in operation, the advantageous section is added during the special combination operation. )).
Here, since it was common to perform an AT lottery even after becoming inside, waiting for an AT win while maintaining the inside without winning a special role even if inside. It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable not to perform an AT lottery in the interior. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special role is won in the normal section and becomes inside, it is determined that the normal section should not shift to the advantageous section in the inside. Furthermore, if a special role is won in an advantageous section and becomes inside, it is determined that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until the next game bet is possible). ), It is necessary to display to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating the advantageous section, etc.).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to consume a certain number of games (via a precursor) from when the AT is won until the AT is notified to the player. It was. Also, for example, when an AT is drawn based on the winning of a rare role, if the player loses a rare role in the game, the player has won the rare role and the AT is drawn based on the rare role. In some cases, even if the rare role is won and the AT is won, the game may be stopped before the AT win is notified. Thereafter, when another person played a game on the table, there was a problem that the other person might enjoy the benefit of the AT (assigned by the previous player). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until the next game can be betted), it is displayed that it is an advantageous section from the next game. Therefore, the above problem does not occur.
As described above, conventionally, the AT winning is notified after the AT winning (especially after the AT sign), but in the present embodiment, in principle, until the next game bet is possible. This is different in that an advantageous section is displayed before the advantageous section is started.
Further, the conventional AT winning notification is merely performed as part of the production, but the player is informed that the next game is an advantageous zone from the next game in this embodiment (a lamp indicating the advantageous zone) Is turned on in order to solve the above problem.

The advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all the game sections (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section in the meantime is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
As will be described later, the advantageous section ratio is displayed in the present embodiment, but the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value obtained by rounding down the decimal point as a result of the calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (until the effective line is reached). Inability to pull in is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. = 1 ".

“PB = 1” has a case where all the reels are so in the role and a case where only the specific (partial) reels are.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to “4”, and when the target symbol is arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1” is obtained, exceeding 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1”. In particular, the number of symbols of the reel of this embodiment is set to “20”, and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is “PB = 1”.

In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game, “N” game, “N + 1” game,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” game. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game is referred to as “current game”. Further, the game of the “N-1” game is referred to as “previous game”.
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

The “rendering rate” is a value calculated by the expected medal payout number / the number of medal inserted. When “1”, the current state is maintained, and when “1” is exceeded, the number of medals increases. If the number is less than “1”, the number of medals is decreased.
In addition, the “medal payout number expectation value” is calculated by the sum of “winning probability of combination × number of payouts” for all the combinations to be selected in the game.

  Furthermore, the “difference number” is a value calculated by “medal payout number (actually paid out medal number or expected medal payout number) −medal insertion number”. When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) in order to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 3 when the accessory is not in operation (during a normal game). On the other hand, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 2 during the operation of the accessory (1BB). In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is carefully inserted from a medal insertion slot, or a bet switch is operated to bet a stored medal.
The “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but electronic information is used as the game medium, for example, in the case of a sealed game machine. “Electronic information” means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. It can be stored in a gaming machine as a gaming medium for performing the game.
In addition, since the display of the ratio of the actors and the like described later can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to the ball game machine, the “game medium” includes not only a medal but also a game ball. It is.

  “Reservation” refers to crediting a medal into the slot machine 10, unlike the “bet”. “Storage” may be used to include a bet, but in this specification, “storage” is used to mean that “bet” is not included. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small role wins and medals are paid out, medals are stored. In addition, when a medal is carefully inserted from the medal insertion slot and the maximum number is already bet, the inserted medal is stored. Therefore, when a medal is cleaned and inserted from the medal slot, it has a case where it is betted and a case where it is stored.

  It is equivalent that the slot machine 10 “pays” a medal to the player and that the player “acquires” a medal. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, “medal payout”, and from the player side, “medal acquisition”. For this reason, there are a case of “payout (number of sheets)” (for example, payout means 67) and a case of “acquirement (number of sheets)” (for example, acquired number display LED 78), which have the same meaning.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (in particular, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “H” at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in a decimal number is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in a binary number and “10 (H)” in a hexadecimal number. In addition, a numerical value indicating a decimal number is expressed as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the end symbols of “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 includes an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (not necessarily including only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow from the peripheral device to the main control board 50, and the peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game. Data (total number of games etc.) necessary to display management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, the lottery of the role, the drive control of the reel 31, and the winning Execute paying out.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality (for example, an A register to an L register, a transmission register, and the like) are provided.

An MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the one installed in the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent into the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43 a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot when the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

  A closing sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. Accordingly, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is further detected by the insertion sensor 44 after being detected by the passage sensor 43a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a checkout switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum or specified number) medals are provided.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  In addition, the specified number of this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but two medals when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted when operated (pressed) three times. Further, during operation of the accessory, if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, it is possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (pays out) a medal that has been bet and / or stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

  The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of an operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display substrate 75. For example, the display substrate 75 includes a plurality of display substrates 75 such as the display substrates 75A, 75B,. Any of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the acquired number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
In FIG. 2, a display board 75 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is disposed in the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The storage number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10 and includes a digit 1 that displays an upper digit and a digit 2 that displays a lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point, a dot-like LED that displays a decimal point). Has been.
As shown in FIG. 2, there are four digits 1 to 4 mounted on the display board 75, but in this embodiment, there are nine digits, and the other digits are the main control board. 60 (details will be described later).

The storage number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are added, three medals are bet for the game (when the prescribed number is three). Therefore, when up to three medals are maintained, the medals are bet and not stored. As medals continue to be maintained, medals are stored in the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal insertion slot 43, the maintained medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

  Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) is awarded and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out, the slot machine 10 has priority over actually paying out a medal from the payout slot. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the stored number before winning a winning combination is “10” and the 9 winning combination wins, the display of the storing number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the number of stored items exceeds “50” when winning a winning combination, the portion exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of reserved coins is “47” before winning a winning combination and nine medals are paid out for winning nine winning combinations, three are stored and the number of storing is “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout slot.

  Further, at the time of replay winning, medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game are automatically bet for replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of medals for replaying, even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medals cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval (hereinafter, simply“ Rule ”)”, when the combination of symbols corresponding to replay is stopped on the active line, It is interpreted as operating and not a “winning”. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but during the advantageous section, it is controlled to be in the lighting state. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he / she is currently staying in the advantageous section by confirming whether the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on / off.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player ends the game and has a stored medal (for example, when “10” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), the player operates the checkout switch 46. The fact that it is not in the advantageous section can be easily confirmed by the unlit state of the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, in this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the settlement switch 46 becomes operable. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the player's will despite being in the advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone from the next game).

Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits, like the storage number display LED 76.
The acquisition number display LED 78 is “00” when there are no medals to be paid out. For example, when nine medals to be described later win a prize and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is: From “00” to “09”.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, an error number “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also serves as a display of an advantageous operation mode by the operation of the acquisition number, error contents, and instruction function. Note that an advantageous push order notification when the instruction function is activated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in this specification, the display of the pressing order using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub control board 80 is “notification of the pressing order”. Called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a “pressing order instruction number”.
Furthermore, the push order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, for example, information such as “= 1” in FIG. 20 is referred to as “push order instruction information”. That is, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed and sealed in a transparent board case 16 because of its security. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed unless the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is broken (the board case 16 cannot be opened). In FIG. 3, the main control board 50 (50 </ b> A and 50 </ b> B) is illustrated so as to be seen through without being blocked by the board case 16. The caulking portion 16a may be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers displaying a certification of the proper main control board 50, a serial number, an opening record of the caulking portion 16 a, and the like are affixed. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so as not to be present.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, and is an LED that displays the current set value when the setting is confirmed or changed. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50. For example, the set value display LED 73 can also be used as the back side of the front door, the storage number display LED 76, or the acquired number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. In order to ensure the visibility of the management information display LED 74, for example, one digit housing in FIG.
It is preferable to design the width m1 × length n ≧ 36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit casing,
It is preferable to design the size such that width m2 × length n ÷ 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), there is one main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. And each board | substrate may be connected by the harness etc. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of different boards, it is necessary to house the whole in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is two main control boards 50A and 50B, and connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, respectively, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used without using a harness (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

  Further, the management information display LEDs 74 are arranged in one horizontal row as shown in Example 1 of (a), and, for example, digits 6 and 7 are arranged in the upper row as shown in Example 2 of (b). The digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in one row on the lower stage.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the digits 1 to 9, the segments A to G, and the segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven) constitute a so-called 7-segment. .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digits of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
In addition, among the digits 2, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the lower digits of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitute 7 segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is not used.

  Further, among the digits 5, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED that is lit during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when only 7 segments are lit, setting is being confirmed, and when 7 segments and segment DP are lit, setting is being changed. The segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

  The segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 in the management information. The segment DP of the digits 6 to 9 is unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, the segment DP of the digit 7 can be turned on. In addition, by turning on the segment DP of the digit 7, it is possible to clarify the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical values, thereby facilitating the confirmation.

FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of segment data. For example, when “0” is displayed on the digit 1, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is “00111111 (B)”.
Further, when “1” is displayed on the digit 2 and the segment B, C, and DP are turned on during the advantageous section, the segment data becomes “10000110 (B)”. That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to “0” or “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “0” or “1”.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 and the like of a symbol display device are electrically connected to a main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, motors 32 for driving the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (cuts) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, a symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  In addition, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute part”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the one payout sensor 37. Has been. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.

For example, when the signals of both the payout sensors 37 are OFF even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when confirming the setting or changing the setting.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing a setting value. For example, every time the setting is changed, the set value is incremented by “1”. In this embodiment, the setting value has setting 1 to setting 6, and during the setting change, every time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value becomes “1” → “2” →. “1” → ... and so on. Note that any setting value is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is confirmed.

In addition, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the switch is turned on, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialized, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects the open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10 and the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Information necessary for production output (control command) is transmitted.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
An effect peripheral device such as the following effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral device for production is not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the production.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs such as a lottery for production, various data, and the like as production data.

  The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and the back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 17). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, and a frame lamp that is disposed on the front face of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. It displays game information (such as the number of games played and the number of games acquired during the operation of an accessory or in an advantageous zone).
The cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is a player's game history), and the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. Used when

Subsequently, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, etc. will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is “Bell A”.
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, “blank” does not mean that a symbol is not displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to “blank” is displayed.
Note that “Bell A”, “Bell B”, and “Bell C” are symbols having similar appearances, but different symbols.

6A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door (not shown)) of the slot machine 10 and each reel 31, and the effective line (design symbol). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing display lines for displaying combinations.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 is arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen. The number on the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 6B illustrates the designation of symbol positions in this specification. In the present specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 are referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from the top. ”,“ Middle left ”, and“ lower left ”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 17.

  Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line (display line) that is a symbol arrangement line when the reel 31 is stopped, and forms a symbol combination, and a symbol corresponding to one of the roles. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In this embodiment, one effective line (a straight line passing through “lower left stage” − “middle middle stage” − “upper right stage”) is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. Yes.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on that line, a profit corresponding to the combination is given. This line does not perform (medal payout etc.). In other words, the invalid line is a line that is not a target of combination of symbols in the first place.

  Conventionally, there are known slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs according to the number of medals inserted. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1. When the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3. When the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and in all games, one shown in FIG. 6A becomes an active line, There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in this specification, the term “effective line” refers to the line illustrated in FIG.

  7 to 12 are diagrams showing combinations of combinations of types (combinations included in a condition device lottered by the combination lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the like in this embodiment. Note that FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers “101” to “101”) as combinations of symbols that are displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won, although it is not a role. “120”).

The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replaying roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  7 to 12, “specified number 3” displayed in the number of payouts, etc. indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is inactive, that is, the number of input during normal game play). The “specified number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 2 (the number of inserted items during operation of the accessory, that is, during the special game). For example, the replay 01 with the number “3” indicates that a replay is performed with a specified number of three, and “−” with a specified number of two indicates that a lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special combinations (combinations). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When winning 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of an accessory).
During a 1BB game (when an accessory is activated), it is an advantageous game for the player that can expect to win medals more than when the accessory is not activated because the payout rate is set to exceed “1”. .

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that allows a re-play to be performed while maintaining the number of medals inserted in this game (automatic betting of medals).
As shown in FIG. 7, the replay of this embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”).
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are transferred to other RTs when winning in a specific RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transition replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 wins at RT2, the next game is shifted to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). For this reason, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when Replay 03 wins at RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

  In addition, the replays 04 and 05 are first used as a control replay for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by overlapping a plurality of replays, and in the present embodiment, Replay included in replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop at the active line.

Furthermore, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and are included in the replay E of the condition device described later. When the replay E is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.
The replay 06 is a replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in the replay D of the condition device described later. When replay D is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). The small roles 01 and 02 are small roles (small roles corresponding to high-level bells) that are won in the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, which will be described later. Further, the small roles 03 to 34 are small roles (small roles corresponding to Anme Bell) that can be won (PB ≠ 1) in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of pressing order bell winning.
Furthermore, the small combinations 35 to 38 are rare small combinations (small combinations corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the small combinations 39 and 40 are small combinations that can be awarded only when the specified number is 2, that is, when the combination is activated.

  As described above, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the incorrect pressing order is determined when the pressing order is won. It is a combination of symbols. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols stops at an effective line in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1, or RT3), the pattern symbol shifts RT (in this embodiment, shifts to RT2). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 always appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) at the time of the incorrect answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the small role B group. However, other symbol combinations (not the combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game selected for the combination, a combination that is carried over after the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined. .
The combination carried over is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB wins, the 1BB winning information is controlled to be carried over after the next game.

  On the other hand, the winning combination of 1BB is carried over, while small plays and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when winning a small combination or replay, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. The right to the elected role will cease.

  When the game is started, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cleans and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (manual bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) performs lottery of the roles by the role lottery means 61 and drives all the motors 32 to control all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) controls the driving of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 and responds to the result lottery result of the role lottery means 61. Thus, stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
“Condition device winning” is also referred to as a role lottery result, lottery result, winning number, winning result, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. And determining means for determining whether the condition device has been won or not and determining the selected condition device.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number for which a counter that performs 1 count at 200 n (nano) sec continues to count as a cycle in a range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table to be described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number “1” (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

13-16 is a figure which shows the kind of condition apparatus lotteryed by the part lottery means 61, and the content of the winning combination contained in each condition apparatus.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing when each condition device is won will be described in the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry the winning information to the next game, as well as the “game condition device” that is a condition device that includes any of the special roles that can carry the winning information to the next game. It consists of a “winning and replay condition device” which is a condition device that includes either a small role or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition device numbers “1” and “2”.
The equipment condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning special role, the equipment condition device number “1” corresponds to the 1BBA winning, and the equipment condition device number “2” wins the 1BBB. Equivalent to.

For example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when 1BBA is selected alone, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small role are duplicated. For example, when 1BBA and a small role D are won simultaneously, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number Becomes “26”.
When 1BB and a small combination or replay are won, the winning of the small combination or replay is given priority in this game (the priority can be arbitrarily set). In addition, since the winning of the small role or replay is valid only in the current game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless winning.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition apparatus will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning role (so-called “losing”).
In addition, the replay A with the condition device number “1” is the single winning of the replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins regardless of push order (in any push order).

Replays B1 to B3 with condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay group B”), and replays C1 to C3 with condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as generic names). In this case, each of them is a duplicate winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is a duplicate winning including at least one of replay 01 or 02. And according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, it sets so that the kind of replay to win may differ.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number “2”, the replay 02 wins in the pressing order of the first left stop, and the replay 01 wins at a time other than the left first stop (middle or first right stop).

In the case of replay overlap winning, there is no concept of high / low for medal payout because the replay (replaying gamer) wins in any pushing order. However, for example, when the replay B1 is won at RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
When the replay C1 is won in RT3, RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, the RT is dropped (relegated) (shifted from RT3 to RT2) by winning the replay 03.

Replay D of the condition device number “8” is a single winning of replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins regardless of push order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate win of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the push order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as a rare replay. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the lottery is drawn at RT1 and the replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 14, the small combination A with the condition device number “10” is arranged in a so-called common bell, and the small combination 01 is a single winner. When winning the small combination A, the small combination 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
14 to 15, the small roles B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small role B group”) having the condition device numbers “11” to “22” correspond to so-called push order bells. The winning combination includes at least one of the small combination 01 (9-bell, 9-sheet combination) and the small combination 03 to 34 (one-sheet combination).

  When these condition devices are selected, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer pressing order is set, “PB = 1” and the small combination 01 which is a high-ranking bell (9 bells, 9 winning combinations) wins a prize. On the other hand, when the order is the wrong answer pressing order, the small combination 03 which is a low-cost bell (one piece combination) according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). -34 wins, and when neither of the small roles wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to missing).

In FIG. 16, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small role C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes in the same manner as the small role B group described above. Corresponding to the order bell, the winning combination includes a small combination 02 (three bells, three combinations) and small combinations 03 to 10 (one combination).
When these condition devices are selected, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer pressing order is set, “PB = 1” and the small combination 02 which is the high-ranking bell (three bells, three roles) wins a prize. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, “PB = 1”, and any one of the small roles 03 to 10 which is an Anme Bell (one-piece combination) wins. Therefore, when winning the small role C group, unlike the winning time of the small role B group, there is no case where a pattern symbol is displayed (missing). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where none of the small roles are won.

When winning the small role B group, there will be 9 payouts when the high-ranking bell wins, so there will be 3 in (inserts) and 9 out (payouts) in the correct push order. The number of sheets is “+6 sheets”. Therefore, the number of medals increases when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the condition device decreases the number of medals when the answer is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role C group, when the high-ranking bell wins, three payouts are made, so when the correct answer is pushed, there are 3 in (inserted number) and 3 out (paid out number). The difference number is “± 0”. Therefore, when the answer is correct in the pushing order, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order (the number of payouts is one), the condition device decreases the number of medals.

  In this way, the reason why both the push order bells for nine payouts and the push order bell for three payouts in the correct push order is provided for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the probability of winning a single role is 25% when the push order is incorrect when winning the small role B group, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is set to be displayed (no payout when pattern symbols are displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, in the case of incorrect answer in the pressing order when winning the small role C group, one winning combination is awarded with “PB = 1”. In this way, it is possible to set the payout rate within an appropriate range by providing two types of push order bells with different payout numbers for the correct answer and the incorrect answer, and appropriately setting the winning probability. become.

The small combination D of the condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small combination (watermelon). The small role D is a single winning of the small role 35 and is set to “PB ≠ 1”.
Further, the small combination E1 with the condition device number “27” and the small combination E2 with the condition device number “28” correspond to a rare small combination (cherry) like the small combination D1. The small combination E1 is a double winning combination of the small combinations 36 and 38, and the small combination E2 is a double winning combination including the small combination 37 in addition to the small combinations 36 and 38. When winning a small combination E1 or E2, two combinations (small combination 36 or 38) win the prize regardless of the push order.

The small combination F with the condition device number “29” is a combination that is drawn only during the 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a double winning combination of the small combinations 01 to 39. When winning the small role F, the small role 39, which is a 10-piece role, wins with “PB = 1”.
The small combination G of the condition device number “30” is a combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single winning combination of the small combination 40. When winning the small role G, the small role 40, which is a nine-piece role, wins with “PB = 1”.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61, and shows the numbers of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT. FIG. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by “65536” gives the winning probability. For example, the number of 1BBA single winners is set to “20” and “10” (total of “30”) for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1 BBA is “30/65536”.

FIG. 17 is a numerical table of condition devices that are common to settings and that can be determined to shift to an advantageous section, or that perform an additional addition of an advantageous section (or that can perform an additional lottery).
Here, “setting common” indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value.
And, when a condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (determined to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous zone (decide to add during the advantageous zone) and a condition device that decides not to move to the advantageous zone (decide not to add during the advantageous zone) It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that decides not to move to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to determine to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “◯” means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to move to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, “◯” is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” is determined to add the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “◯” It may mean that a lottery is selected to shift to an advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean a lottery whether or not to add an advantageous section.

FIG. 18 shows condition devices and their numbers that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and that are not determined to be added to the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or to add the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is selected, and the condition device shown in FIG. In the win, none of them decides to move to the advantageous section and decides to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, the numerical values of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, but actually, as described above, the setting value has six stages of setting 1 to setting 6 and the setting value is set. A numeric value for each value is defined.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, since the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-inside, it is drawn in non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Moreover, 1BBA and 1BBB have the case where it wins independently, and the case where it overlaps with small part D, E1, or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a case where it wins alone. A condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB that is drawn in RT4 is treated as a single winning combination of the small role D, E1, or E2. Therefore, the numbers that become the single winning of the small role D in RT4 are “580” to “585” in total, and the numbers that become the single winning of the small role E1 in RT4 are “1030” in total, The numbers that become the single winning of the small role E2 in RT4 are "310" to "370" in total.
Also, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of 1BBB or to add an advantageous section. Never happen.

Replay D is drawn only during the 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. When the replay E is won at RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set so that it does not appear in other RTs, the replay E is drawn in lots only at RT1.
Further, the small combinations D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not operated, and are not drawn when the accessory is operated.
On the other hand, the small combinations F and G are not drawn when the combination is not activated, but are drawn only when the combination is activated.

  In FIG. 17, the total number of 1BBA single winners is “30”, but in this embodiment, the number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a numeric value “10” determined not to shift. That is, in the case of winning 1BBA alone, if the number “20” is won, and if the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where 1 BBA is elected alone, if the number “10” is elected, the advantageous section is not elected.

In addition, when 1 BBA is elected alone during the advantageous section, it is decided to add the advantageous section for both the number “20” and “10”.
Similarly, the number of the winning combination of the small role E1 is “1000” in total, but in this embodiment, the number “250” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a numeric value “750” that is determined not to be transferred to “”.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the single winning number for the small role E1 is set to one “1000” (not divided into the “250” and the “750”), and the small role E1 is won. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. For example, it may be decided to move to the advantageous interval with a probability of 25% and not decide to move to the advantageous interval with a probability of 75%. In this way, it is possible to provide a number that is won in the advantageous section from the beginning and a number that is not won in the advantageous section, but the value itself is a single value, and when the number is won, the transition is made to the advantageous section. You may make it perform the lottery (two-step lottery) of whether to do.
In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the interior), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when winning the small role D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB is selected alone and 1BBB and small combination D are both selected, the decision regarding the advantageous section is not made. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided after the end of the operation of 1BBB (after transition to RT1).
The small role E2 has a case where it wins redundantly with 1BBB and a case where it wins alone, but neither makes a decision regarding an advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, in the case of winning the small role E1, there are cases where the determination regarding the advantageous section is performed for both the single winning of the small role E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the replay A, replay B group, and replay C group condition devices are common in setting, but are not determined to move to the advantageous section, and are added in the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, at the time of winning the replay condition device, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including lottery) or decided to add an advantageous section (including lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the numbers are slightly different between setting 1 and setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), and replay A, replay B group, The replay group C may be set separately.

  In FIG. 18, Replay A is drawn in all RTs when the accessory is not in operation. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3. The small combination A, small combination B group, and small combination C group all have a setting difference between setting 1 and setting 6, but the numbers are the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of “special combination and small combination” in FIG. 18, in setting 1 and setting 6, setting 6 has a higher probability of winning 1BB and small combination. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the “Replay” table, the winning probability of replay is highest at RT3. And, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the medal is increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of pushing order bell winning, but the gaming state is reduced by the replay winning with less decrease of the medal. .

Further, the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are all set in a condition device having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small role A is “250”, and the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small role B group (whole) is “240 (20 × 12)”. It is. Therefore, the small combination A has a larger number difference than the small combination B group. Thereby, the difference of the payout rate according to a set value can be provided reliably by making the direction of the number of the small combination A which does not have a winning difference according to a pushing order into a larger value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning the small role A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the correct answer in the pushing order when winning the small role B group are set identically (described later), the small role A The set value cannot be estimated by counting the number of winning (winning).

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small role B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small role C group. Here, when the specified number is 3, the maximum payout number is 9, and during the advantageous section, at least 1 instruction function operation game in which the payout number is 9 (maximum payout number with the specified number of 3) is 1 Need to be executed once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when the small group B is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small role B group higher than the winning probability of the small role C group, it is won by one instruction function operation game (small role C group, replay B group, replay C group) It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in an advantageous section that ends only with a game (excluding played games). Furthermore, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be ended because the small part B group has not been won once during the predetermined number of times, even though it is an advantageous section that ends by executing a predetermined number of games. be able to.

Returning to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of winning flags corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. When any of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the replay B1 is won, the two winning flags Replay 01 and Replay 02 included in the conditional device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-inside medium game, when the small role B1 is won, the small role 01, the small role 03, the small role 10, the small role 11, the small role 18, the small role 19 and the small role included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings for small roles other than 1BB and replay are not carried over, so even if the winning combination for the small role or replay is won in this game, and the winning flag for these roles is turned on, the current game will end. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, if 1BB is won in the game this time and the winning flag relating to the 1BB won is once turned on, the ON state is maintained until the 1BB wins, Turned off when 1BB wins.

  Also, for example, when the winning lottery means 61 duplicates 1BBA and small role D, the winning flag of the small role 35 corresponding to 1BBA and small role D is turned on, and there is no case where both roles win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA does not win, regardless of whether the small role 35 has won or not, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on and the winning flag of the small role 35 is turned off.

Furthermore, for example, when the 1BBA is won by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. .
Furthermore, in the next game, when winning the small role A1, in addition to 1BBA carrying over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and when 1BBA does not win at the end of this game, 1BBA The winning flag is kept on, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
Note that the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number in any of the advantageous section and the normal section. The push order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number is always “A0” during the normal section.
The selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except that the push order instruction number “A0” is transmitted during the normal section). Therefore, even if the push order designation number is selected by the push order designation number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order designation number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device has a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay A is “A0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction numbers include “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. The push order instruction number “A0” does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (the push order does not cause any advantage / disadvantage, that is, the push order does not matter).
In addition, the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A2” is the middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay group B is set to the push order for winning the replay 02 (push order for promoting RT).
Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination B group is set to the pressing order for winning the small combination 01 (9 sheets).
In addition, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination C group is set to the pressing order for winning the small combination 02 (three).

  In FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50). In this embodiment, push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed. Show. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the display of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7-segment), respectively. When “=” is displayed, segments D and G in FIG. 4 are turned on in 7 segments (see FIG. 26 described later). Further, when the push order instruction number is “A0”, there may be no display (no segment is lit).

Furthermore, “display content 2” indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub-control board 80, and in this embodiment, is the correct answer pressing order displayed on the image display device 23.
Note that “operation of the instruction function” means display using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub control board 80 corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device “11” is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number “A1” is selected, and “= 1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function. The Further, on the image display device 23, for example, “1 ○○” or the like is displayed on the image so that the player can understand that it is the first left stop.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction numbers (* 1) when winning the small role A are as follows.
When winning the small role A, since the small role 01 wins regardless of the pressing order, there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selection rates are “1/3” respectively. By setting in this way, when the small role A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the pressing order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small role A or the small role B group in the game. The reason for this setting is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number) of the small combination A is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. Therefore, it becomes possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times that the small role 01 has won in a game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a strategy, when the small role A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display the dummy push order instruction information. Of course, it is not impossible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small role 01 has won in the game in which the instruction function is activated, but the number of times in which the small role 01 has won in the game in which the instruction function is not activated. More trials are required than when estimating the set value by counting.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small roles E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small role E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1BB is elected during the advantageous section and becomes inside, the advantageous section is not added. For this reason, in the advantageous section and inside (in the gaming section where the advantageous section is not added), the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination E1 is selected (the combination of the symbols that is expected to add the advantageous section) If a certain middle cherry) stops, there is a risk of giving the player an impression of wasting. Therefore, when the small part E1 is won in the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number “A3” is selected, the instruction function is activated, and “right first stop” is displayed.

  When the small switch E1 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right, as shown in FIG. 16, the so-called middle cherry does not stop. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. In addition, since each of the small roles 36 or 38 that can be awarded when winning the small role E1, the payout number is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and in this embodiment, it is set within 1500 games. Therefore, even when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is reached, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In the case of having such a game, for example, when the small role E1 is won and the middle cherries are displayed when the game is close to 1500 games in the advantageous section, the player expects to add the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small role E1 is won, the middle cherries are not displayed as in the case of winning in the inside. Activating the instruction function, display the right first stop.

When the small role E2 is won, as shown in FIG. However, when the small role E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if there are more than 1400 games from the inside or the beginning of the advantageous section, if the middle cherry is displayed, the player may be misunderstood. , Right first stop is displayed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small role E2 is won, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not made in the first place, so that the middle stage cherry may be displayed without the operation of the instruction function as described above.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As a result of the lottery of the condition devices, it is also conceivable to send the winning winning and replay condition device numbers themselves to the sub-control board 80. However, in this embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers won in the current game.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined in advance. Then, after lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the current game, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device has a unique production group number. For example, the production group number corresponding to the winning of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group is defined as “5”. The production group numbers corresponding to the winnings of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group may be different, such as “5”, “6”, and “7”, respectively.

Therefore, the main control board 50 selects “5” as the effect group number when winning the small role A, the small role B group or the small role C group as a result of the lottery of the condition device. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the production group number is “5”, the sub-control board 80 knows that in this game, any of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. it can. Thereby, the winning effect of the bell can be output.

  However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number “5” has been won, or when the player has won one of the small roles B group in the game, You can't know the order. In this embodiment, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the correct push order are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous section, but are not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 can output the fact that the winning combination of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won and the correct pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number as an effect. it can. On the other hand, in the normal section and the standby section, the sub-control board 80 remains in the effect of winning either the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group (bell), and the correct answer pressing order. Cannot be output as a production.

  Even if the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to different effect group numbers. For example, the push order instruction number when winning the replay B1 is “A1” (first left), and the push order instruction number when winning the small role C1 is “A1” (first left) In either case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  However, when the replay B1 is won, the production group number “2” is transmitted, and when the small role C1 is won, the production group number “5” is transmitted. For this reason, when the production group number “2” is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order using, for example, blue indicating replay. When the production group number “5” is transmitted, for example, a bell It becomes possible to notify the correct pressing order using the yellow color indicating.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to on / off of the winning flag in the current game after lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined and the motor 32 is driven based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated. Control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to be within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “replay” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage (on the active line), four frames ahead, that is, the fifth “bell” The symbols up to “B” can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bita stop) to No. 5 (4 tops) are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 frames from the symbol next to the symbol positioned on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “replay” of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage, from the next symbol, that is, the second “blank”, Up to “Replay” No. 6, which is the symbol ahead of the four frames, becomes a symbol that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is 4 frames from the symbols positioned on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to stop as much as possible on the predetermined effective line (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and according to a predetermined priority order, The highest priority drawing pull-in control is performed.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which one of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), what The stop position is determined in advance such that the number of symbols is stopped at the lower left stage by controlling the movement of only the symbols (in the number of frames).

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, in all the reels 31, four “replays” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “replay” of all the reels 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four of “Bell A” and “Bell B” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
In the middle reel 31, four “bells C” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “bell C” of the middle reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four “Bell A” and “Bell B” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.

Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four “cherries” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “cherry” of the right reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
In addition, on the left reel 31, four of “Black 7” and “Watermelon” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of “blue 7” and “cherry” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the right reel 31, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “blank”, or “red 7” is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these four symbols is “PB = 1”.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, “cherry” is arranged at the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and is not “PB = 1”.
Similarly, with respect to “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 have a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that a combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the active line.

  The replay A table is used when replay A is won (replay 01 is a single winner), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the reels are set so that the replay 01 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. 31 stop positions are defined. The symbols of the reels 31 related to the replay 01 and replays 02 to 06 described later have a “PB = 1” arrangement in all the reels 31. Accordingly, the replay that is always won at the time of winning the replay (when a plurality of replays are duplicated, one of the replays that is won repeatedly) always wins.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of replay B1 winning, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay 02 is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game using the replay B1 table, at the time of the first left stop, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, “Replay” stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of middle second stop, “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the time of the third stop on the right, “cherry” is stopped at the upper right. In this case, “Replay” stops at the lower right. As a result, “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Replay” − “Cherry” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 02 is won. Furthermore, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “upper left”-“middle middle”-“lower right”.

On the other hand, in the game using the replay B1 table, “blue 7” or “cherry” is stopped at the middle and middle level during the middle first stop (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops in the middle and upper stages. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, “replay” stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, “replay” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). As a result, “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Replay” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 01 is won. Furthermore, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “upper left”-“middle upper”-“upper right”.

In a game in which the replay B1 table is used, the same control as that at the middle first stop is performed at the first right stop.
Further, with respect to the replay B2 table at the time of replay B2 winning and the replay B3 table at the time of replay B3 winning, the replay 02 is won at the correct push order and the replay 01 is awarded at the incorrect push order.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game at the time of replay C1 winning, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay 01 is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control for stopping the replay 01 on the active line at the time of the first left stop is the same as the replay B1 table, and thus the description is omitted.
In the game using the replay C1 table, “replay” is stopped at the middle and middle stage during the middle first stop (“PB = 1”). Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops in the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “Replay” stops in the middle right. As a result, “Bell A / Bell B” − “Replay” − “Watermelon” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 03 is won. Further, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “middle left”-“middle middle”-“middle right”.

In a game using the replay C1 table, the same control as at the middle first stop is performed at the right first stop.
Furthermore, with respect to the replay C2 table when the replay C2 is selected and the replay C3 table when the replay C3 is selected, the replay 01 is awarded when the push order is correct and the replay 03 is awarded when the push order is incorrect. .

The replay D table is used in a game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 06 is stopped at the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined. The replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
In addition, the replay E table is used in the game when the replay E is won, and the reel 31 is set so that the replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. 31 stop positions are defined. In this case, either “Replay 04” or “05” can be stopped by “PB = 1”.

  The small role A table is used in a game when winning the small role A, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01 is stopped on the reel 31 so that the small role 01 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position is determined. The combination of symbols of the small role 01 is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell C” − “replay”, and “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. When “Black 7 / Watermelon” stops at the lower left, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the middle left. Furthermore, when “Replay” stops at the upper right, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the right middle. Therefore, when winning the small role 01, “Bell A / Bell B”-“Bell C”-“Bell A / Bell B” are stopped at “Left middle stage”-“Middle middle stage”-“Right middle stage”.

  The small role B1 table is used in the game when winning the small role B1, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first left stop (at the correct push order), Except at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), a single combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination B1 is won, any of the small combinations 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line or stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

At the time of the first left stop in the game using the small role B1 table (at the correct answer in the pressing order), it is the same as the small role A table, so the description is omitted.
Even when the following small role B2 table to small role B12 table is used, the same stop control as that of the small role A table is performed when the correct answer is pressed.
As a result, at the time of winning the small role A and the correct answer in the small role B group winning time, the small role 01 always wins, and “left middle”-“middle middle”-“right middle” “Bell A / Bell B” − “Bell C” − “Bell A / Bell B” stops. Therefore, even if the small role 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small role A is won or the correct answer is the push order when the small role B group is won.

In addition, even during the advantageous section, when the small role A is won, if the instruction function is operated with a dummy as described above, it is determined whether the player is the small role A or the small role B group. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning number of the small combination A. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of winnings of the small combination A. However, if the stoppage is the same between the winning combination of the small role A and the correct answer in the small role B group winning, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small role A. Can not guess.

In the game using the small role B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, at the time of winning the small combination B1, as shown in FIG. 14, the seven small combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 piece)
Small part 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, as a stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small combinations having different payout numbers are selected, the following method is exemplified.
As the first priority, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination (of the reel 31) can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is set to “number priority” ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the “number priority” is to stop (pull in) the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts among the combinations of symbols that are selected in duplicate, with priority on the line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 corresponds to a combination of symbols (9 sheets) having the largest number of payouts.
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is maximized.

  For example, when the small combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is performed, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all the middle reels 31 related to the winning combination on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols for the medium reel 31 of the selected small role, but there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the effective line.

Therefore, when the small combination B group is selected, the reel 31 is controlled to stop according to either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number of sheets when the correct answer is in the pressing order, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. When the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number, the small combination 01 (nine-piece combination) is configured so that a single combination can be won without winning (so that it may be missed).
Thus, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that priority is given to the number of sheets in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in the present embodiment), and priority is given to the number in other pressing orders (incorrect answer pressing order in the present embodiment). Depending on the number, priority is given to the number of sheets or priority is given to the number.

In the above example, when priority is given to the number at the time of middle first stop (when pressing order is incorrect), stop either "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the active line and stop on the active line The maximum number of possible symbol combinations is two each. For example, if the “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small role 03 or 11 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of two symbols, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is always stopped. Can be made.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 03 or 11 can win.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell A” or “Bell C” on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “Bell A” is arranged at 15th and 0th, and “Bell C” is arranged at 18th. For this reason, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are No. 11 to No. 19 and No. 0, “Bell A” or “Bell C” can be stopped on the active line, When the number is 1 to 10, “Bell A” or “Bell C” cannot be stopped at the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming a specific symbol), “Bell A” or “Bell C” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. In particular, in this embodiment, since “Bell A” can be stopped without stopping “Bell C”, the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are No. 11 to No. 19 and No. 0. Is always stopped at the active line.
In this way, the reason for stopping “Bell A” without stopping “Bell C” is to make it possible to display a pattern symbol to be described later when the winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop. This is because the pattern symbol cannot be displayed if the “bell C” is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when “bell A” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon” among the pattern symbols of which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “Bell A”. Since “PB = 1” of “Black 7” or “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" .
Further, before the third stop on the right, when “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” can be stopped on the active line. Bell A "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell A” on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 4 to No. 13, stop “Bell A”. “Bell A” cannot be stopped within the other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is randomly stopped, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Bell A” is obtained, and the small role 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell A”-“Bell A”-“Rotating”, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is set to the active line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell A” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped on the active line during the first stop during the small role B1 winning (when the push order is incorrect). In this case, at this time, the small combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell B” or “red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 18, on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “Bell B” is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and “Red 7” is arranged at No. 7. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, “Bell B” or “Red 7” can be stopped on the active line, otherwise In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. In particular, in this embodiment, since “Bell B” can be stopped without stopping “Red 7”, when the symbol of the left reel 31 is No. 1 to No. 10 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Always stops “Bell B” on the active line.

  On the other hand, if the “bell B” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern design in which the design of the middle reel 31 is “Bell B” is “Black 7” or “Watermelon”. Since “PB = 1” of “Black 7” or “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating". .
Further, before the third stop on the right, when “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” can be stopped on the active line. Bell B "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell B” on the effective line, the pattern of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 14 to No. 18, or No. 19 to No. 3. “Bell B” can be stopped, and “Bell B” cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B” is obtained and the small role 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is set to the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, at the time of the first stop during the winning of the small role B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol relating to one piece with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1”. The symbol relating to one winning combination can be stopped with a probability of “/ 2”. Furthermore, when the symbol related to one combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of small first B1 winning at the time of the middle stop (when the push order is incorrect)
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Minor Role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small part 10)
Either.

Next, the case of the right first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is two each. And become the maximum. For example, if “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small role 03 or 19 can be won. “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols. it can.
First, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 03 or 19 can be won.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell A” or “bell C”, which is a symbol related to the small role 03 or 19, on the active line. Here, in the same manner as described above, priority is given to the stop of “Bell A”. “Bell A” can be stopped with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the total of two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" .
Further, in the case of “Bell A”-“Rotating”-“Bell A” before the middle third stop, when “Bell A” can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “ Bell A "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell A” on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 5 to 14, stop “Bell A” “Bell A” cannot be stopped within the other range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Bell A” is obtained, and the small role 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” "Is stopped at the active line (" PB = 1 "in the total of 2 symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line.
Further, in the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is first stopped. In this case, at this time, the small combination 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell B” or “red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 26, on the active line. Here, priority is given to the stop of “Bell B”. “Bell B” can be stopped with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the total of two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, it is “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”. .
Further, in the case of “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” before the middle third stop, when “Bell B” can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “ Bell B "is stopped. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped randomly, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B” is obtained and the small role 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “bell B”-“rotating”-“bell B”, when “bell B” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “blue 7” or “cherry” "Is stopped at the active line (" PB = 1 "in the total of two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line.
Further, in the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one piece with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1”. The symbol relating to one winning combination can be stopped with a probability of “/ 2”. Furthermore, when the symbol related to one combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the first stop right at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect)
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Minor Role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small part 10)
Either.
The winning rate and the pattern symbol stop rate are the same as those in the middle first stop.
Therefore, when winning the small role B1, the small role 01 wins with “PB = 1” at the time of the first stop on the left (at the correct push order). On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop (when the push order is incorrect), one winning combination wins with a probability of “1/4” and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. .

In the case of winning the small role B2, the small role B2 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included at the time of winning the small role B2 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" during the left stop. Here, since “bell A” can be stopped when “bell C” can be stopped, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Bell A” — “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Bell A” — “Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 04 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7”. Here, since “Bell B” can be stopped when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 09 is won. Further, when “bell A” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” at the left stop. Here, since “Bell B” can be stopped when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 09 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, since “bell A” can be stopped when “bell C” can be stopped, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell B”.

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 is won. Further, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B2, when the push order is incorrect,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Minor 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Either.

In the case of winning the small role B3, the small role B3 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B3 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “bell A” is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either “bell B” or “red 7” during the left stop. Here, similarly to the above, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Bell A” − “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 08 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, similarly to the above, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the small role 05 is won. Further, when “bell A” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C” at the left stop. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell A”.

When “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, “Bell B” is stopped when it is possible to stop “Bell B” during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 05 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7”. Here, “Bell B” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it can be stopped during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B3,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (Minor 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Either.

In the case of winning the small role B4, the small role B4 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B4 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” during the left stop. Stop “Bell B”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Bell A” − “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" at the right stop. As a result, the small role 07 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it can be stopped when it stops right. As a result, the small role 06 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of first right stop at the time of winning the small role B4 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” at the left stop. Here, “Bell B” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during an intermediate stop. As a result, the small role 07 is won. Further, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell B”.

When “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, “Bell B” is stopped when it is possible to stop “Bell B” during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 06 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B4,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small part 07)
Either.

In the following, a detailed description of each of the small roles B5 to B12 tables at the time of winning the small roles B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small role B5 table used at the time of winning the small role B5, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct push order, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B1 winning.
Also, in the small role B6 table used when winning the small role B6, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct push order answer, and the small role 04 with the probability of “1/4” at the incorrect push order answer. Or, the small role 09 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B2 winning.

Furthermore, in the small role B7 table used when winning the small role B7, the small role 01 wins during the first stop during the correct push order, and the small role has a probability of 1/4 when the correct push order is incorrect. 05 or small role 08 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B3 winning.
Furthermore, in the small role B8 table used when winning the small role B8, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct pressing order, and the small role 06 with a probability of “¼” when the incorrect pressing order is correct. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B4 winning.

In the small role B9 table used when winning the small role B9, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of “¼” when the push order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B1 winning.
In the small role B10 table used when winning the small role B10, the small role 01 wins when the right first stop is in the correct push order, and the small role 04 has a probability of “¼” when the incorrect push order is correct. Or, the small role 09 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B2 winning.

Furthermore, in the small role B11 table used when winning the small role B11, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role has a probability of 1/4 when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small role 08 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B3 winning.
In addition, in the small role B12 table used when winning the small role B12, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role 06 has a probability of “¼” when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B4 winning.

  As is clear from the above, one combination that can be awarded in the case of incorrect answer in the pressing order at the time of winning the small combination B group is the small combination 03 to the small combination 10. Therefore, other small roles included in each condition device are not won. This setting is related to a single combination that can be won when winning a small combination C group to be described later.

  The small role C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small role 02 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), Except at the time of the first stop (at the time of incorrect push order), so as to stop the single role included in the winning combination (any of the small roles 03 to 10 at the time of the small role C1 winning) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  When winning a small role C1 (same for small roles C2 and C3, which will be described later), in the correct push order, as in the case of winning the small role B group, the small role 02 (three-time role) is to be won in the priority order. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 02 is “Bell A / Bell B” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Watermelon”, and “PB = 1” in all reels 31. . Therefore, the small combination 02 can always be won in the correct answer in the pressing order.

  Further, when the small combination C1 is won, when the answer is incorrect (the middle or right first stop), control is performed so that the single combination (small combination 03 to 10) is won with priority on the number. Here, the symbol combinations of the small roles 03 to 10 are combinations of symbols “Bell A” or “Bell B” for each reel 31 as shown in FIG. 8. Furthermore, among the combinations of symbols of the small roles 03 to 10, in any reel 31, there are four “Bell A” and four “Bell B”, and either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is selected. Even if it is stopped, the number priority condition is satisfied. In particular, when the small combination C2 and small combination C3 are won, the small combination 21 and the small combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small combinations are included in the winning combination, the type of the symbol with priority on the number does not change. In all the reels 31, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is “PB = 1” as a sum of two symbols. Therefore, any of the small roles 03 to 10 can always be won.

  As described above, when winning the small combination C1, the small combination 02 (three-piece combination) wins when the correct answer is in the pushing order (“PB = 1”), and when the incorrect answer is in the pushing order, one of the small roles 03 to 10 (1 The winning combination ("PB = 1") won't cause a spill (stop of pattern symbols) unlike the small role B group winning.

  The small role C2 table and the small role C3 table respectively used when winning the small role C2 and winning the small role C3 are the same as the small role C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, the middle first stop is in the correct pushing order when the small combination C2 is won, and the right first stop is in the correct pushing order when the small combination C3 is won. Since the stop control for winning the small role 02 or the small roles 03 to 10 is the same as that for winning the small role C1, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, one single combination (small role 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small role B group is won and one single role that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small role C group is won ( The small roles 03 to 10) are the same. Thereby, it is not possible to determine which of the small role B group or the small role C group is won in the game only by looking at the winning of the small roles 03 to 10.

  The small role D table is used in a game at the time of winning the small role D, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small role 35 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. In the small role D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is not related. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of symbols of the small role 35 is the same as “watermelon”. “Watermelon” has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB = 1” arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game using the small role D table, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “watermelon” stops on the active line, the “watermelon” stops on the active line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, and the small part 35 is lost.

  The small role E1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small role 36 or 38 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, so that it becomes a so-called middle cherry stop form (so that “cherry” stops at the left middle stage). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop.

  The winning of the small role E1 includes the small roles 36 and 38 (further, the small role E2 includes the small role 37 at the time of winning the small role E2, which will be described later). The given number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by a predetermined arbitrary stop control. For this reason, control is performed so that the winning of the small combination 36 is given priority during the left or middle first stop, and control is performed so that the winning of the small combination 38 is given priority during the first right stop.

  In FIG. 5, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when “Cherry” is stopped in the middle left, “Blank” or “Red 7” is stopped in the active line in the lower left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small role 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when “Red 7” of No. 7 is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop (“Cherry” is stopped at the left middle stage), “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is effective when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7”, or “Blank” (4 symbols combined, “PB = 1)) is stopped at the active line. As a result, the small role 36 is won.
In addition, when the second or twelfth “blank” is stopped at the lower left when the left reel 31 is stopped (“cherry” is stopped at the left middle), when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is stopped on the active line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7” or “Blank” is stopped on the active line. . As a result, the small role 36 is won.

Also during the middle first stop, the stop control is performed in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the symbols related to the small role 36 are stopped when the middle and right reels 31 are “PB = 1”, and the left reel 31 has a case where “red 7” or “blank” stops and a case where they do not stop ( “PB ≠ 1”).
However, when “Red 7” or “Blank” cannot be stopped in the lower left stage at the first left or middle stop, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped. “Bell A” or “Bell B” can be stopped by “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is “Bell A / Bell B” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank”, and the small role 38 wins.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small role E1 table is used, the winning of the small role 38 is given priority when the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, “Bell A / Bell B”-“Blue 7 / Cherry”-“Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank” stops and the small role 38 wins with “PB = 1”. .
Furthermore, at the time of the first stop on the right, even if “Cherry” can be stopped at the left middle when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Berry A” or “Bell” is not stopped at the lower left. B ”(in this case,“ Cherry ”is not stopped in the middle left) is stopped.

The small role E2 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 36 or 38 (or the small role 37) is stopped on the effective line. The stop position is determined.
Therefore, since the small combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small combination E1 table, the same stop position determination table can be used.

  Alternatively, in the case of the first left stop, only when “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped at the lower left stage (when the middle cherry is stopped), “replay” is set to the active line for the middle reel 31. It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and for the right reel 31, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped. Thereby, the small role 37 wins a prize. If the stop control is performed in this way, the stop control can be performed to determine whether the small role E1 is won or the small role E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is stopped.

The small role F table is used in a game when the small role F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any of the small roles 01 to 39 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined.
In the present embodiment, the small combination F is drawn by lottery only during 1BB operation.
Further, the small combination F table performs stop control with priority on the number of sheets, regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42. Thereby, the small role 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged by adding the two symbols “Cherry” or “Bell C”, so that the small role 39 wins with “PB = 1”.

  The small role G table is used in a game at the time of winning the small role G, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small role 40 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small combination 40 is composed of a combination of symbols arranged with “PB = 1” for all the reels 31, the small combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when a game is performed when the equipment condition device number “1” is won (1BBA alone is elected), or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and the current game is not won, and the reel 31 is stopped. The combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the effective line and the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA is not stopped on the effective line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is “red 7” in all the reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), “red 7” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pushed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when a game is performed when the equipment condition device number “2” is won (1BBB single winner), or when 1BBB is won before the previous game, and this game is not won, and the reel 31 Within the range of stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBB is not stopped on the effective line. The combination is determined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless they are pushed.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small role or replay are won, or in the game in which 1BB was won before the previous game and the small role or replay was won in the current game, the following stop control is performed. Is mentioned.

For example, first of all, if it is not possible to stop both symbols on the active line with priority given to stopping the symbols of both 1BB and the small roles or replays that have been won, the winning small The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a combination or a replay to an effective line is mentioned. The stop control for stopping the symbols of both 1BB and the small role or replay on the active line is up to the second stop, and at the third stop, the control is performed so that 1BB, the small role or the replay is won. The role of will not win twice.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small role or replay symbols on the active line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning 1BB Stop control that gives priority to stopping the symbol on the active line (opposite to the above).

  Third, although priority is given to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, When the winning 1BB symbol can be simultaneously stopped on the active line, stop control is performed in which the symbol is stopped at that position.

  When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and a small role or replay of “PB = 1” are duplicated (when winning simultaneously), the winning 1BB symbol and the small role or replay It is not necessary to perform control for stopping both of the symbols on the effective line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the small role or replay symbol of “PB = 1” is stopped on the effective line. Accordingly, since the small roles E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small role E1 or E2 is respectively selected when the 1BBA and the small role E1 of the present embodiment are overlapped, or when the 1BBB and the small role E2 are simultaneously selected. It is also possible to execute stop control for winning a prize.

Returning to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the active line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won a prize). Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the active line by detecting, for example, the angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the winning combination determining means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, and when the winning combination is won. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or credits are added. Further, at the time of replay winning, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied when each game and all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. Is.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the type (number) of condition devices to be selected and their winning probabilities differ for each RT.

  In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of stop display of the symbol combination or at the time of winning the RT transition combination, that is, at all stops (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, during RT1, when the pattern symbols are stopped when all the reels 31 are stopped, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 during the entire stop. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won of 1BB. Also good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won by 1BB.

The non-internal game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Further, the game in the inside corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled so that it stays at RT3. However, when a player presses the stop switch 42 in the wrong order, it may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed, and the advantageous section may be terminated. Of course, you may make it stay at RT3 fundamentally.

In the non-RT, non-internal game of RT1 to RT3, a lottery of an accessory condition device is performed. When 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal game.
In addition, when 1BB wins in the game won for 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started when the current game is completely stopped, and in this case, RT4 (internal game) is not passed.

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the 1BBA operation end condition is set such that the number of payouts exceeds 150.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation. When it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 terminates the 1BBA operation. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The 1BBB operation is the same as described above. When the operation proceeds during the 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition for the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when determining that more than 200 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 determines that the operation end condition of 1 BBB is satisfied, Control to shift to RT1 from the next game.

  In addition, the replay is not included in the count of 150 sheets or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, during the 1BB operation, there is a case where the replay D is won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay does not count as the number of payouts. For this reason, the number of games during the operation of 1BB increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of Replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation More than the expected number of games in the middle.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, the RB is continuously operated. The RB is ended when either of two winning combinations or two games are satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition for the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small combination E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small combination E2 is won and the small combination 36 or 38 wins, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games until setting 6 reaches the end condition (exceeding 150) during 1 BBA operation is greater than setting 1. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation in the advantageous section, since the expected value for winning Replay D is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1, the probability that the advantageous section is added increases. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized when the 1BB winning is carried over, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until a pattern symbol is displayed. In non-RT, when the small role B group is drawn and one of the small role B groups is won and the selected small role is missed, a pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, RT1 is maintained until a pattern symbol is displayed, as in non-RT. When a pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT having the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the Replay B group is won and Replay 02 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game shifts to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won and the game is continued until the replay 03 wins. In RT3, when a pattern symbol is displayed or when Replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and not in the interior), most people go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying at RT2 is the highest in terms of probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game moves to RT4 (inside).

  In addition, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section during the normal section, when the game decided to move to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, the instruction function at the time of winning the replay group C And the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed. Thereby, the fall to RT2 is prevented. Further, when winning the small role B group, the correct function pressing order for winning the small role 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when winning the small role C group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small role 02 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer for winning Replay 02 by operating the instruction function while operating the instruction function as described above, when the replay group B is won. The push order is displayed, and control is performed to shift to RT3.
In addition, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to an advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function In the game that can be operated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the instruction function is not operated, and it waits until the pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of the instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-inner middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-inner middle game.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the advantageous section is simultaneously selected. Decide to migrate. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to being in the non-inside, and it is not determined to move from the normal section to the advantageous section in the interior.

In addition, as described above, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the winning lottery result (the winning condition device), the condition device having a setting difference cannot be selected as a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section on the condition that the condition device common to the setting is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is elected alone, there are a case where it is determined to shift to an advantageous section and a case where it is not determined to shift. When the random number value included in the range of the numerical value “20” is extracted from the numerical value “30” assigned to the single winning of 1 BBA, it is decided to move to the advantageous interval, and the numerical value “10”. When a random value included in the range is extracted, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous interval. “1BBA + small role D”, “1BBA + small role E1”, and single winning of small role E1 are the same as above.

  Further, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in any case. In addition, when winning these condition devices, it is also possible not to add an advantageous section uniformly, but to make an extra lottery, or to draw whether or not to make an extra lottery However, in this embodiment, for the sake of simplification of description, the advantageous section is added uniformly.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section having a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, the end condition of the advantageous section is not determined by the number of games, but end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of wins for the small role B group, the number of times the instruction function is activated, etc.) Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to an advantageous section in which end conditions are set as follows.
Specifically, for example, it may be determined as follows.
When 1BBA is elected alone (place number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games. When 1BBA + small role D overlaps win (place number "5"): The initial value is 1BB Counting from the end of the game and shifting to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small role E1 overlapping winning (number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of the 1BB game and transitions to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When winning combination D alone (place number “50”): Advantageous section with initial value of 150 games When winning small role E1 alone (placement “250”): Advantageous section with initial value of 100 games, or one small combination Any of the advantageous sections that end with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be determined by lottery. Or, it is included in the range of the number “120” in the number “250”. When the random value to be extracted is extracted, the initial value is 10 (If the random number value included in the range of the number “130” is extracted as an advantageous section of 0 game, it may be an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, in order to give a premiere feeling when winning the small role D, the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role D is small. It is set more than when winning the role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1 may be set larger than that at the time of winning the small role D.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when winning 1BBA alone, the number of games in the advantageous section is increased by “30”, and the small role E1 is elected alone (number “250”). ) Is added to the number of games by “50”, and when the small role E1 is elected alone (number “750”), the number of games is added by “20”, and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “¼” (“250” in the total number “1000”). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small combination E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries, but the probability of determining to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
In other words, the player can be given an impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to move to the advantageous section.
In contrast to the present embodiment, setting 1 may be set higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small role E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the appearance probability of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability that it will be decided to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small role E2 is elected alone in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Accordingly, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherry appears is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, the player can be given an impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination whose winning number is common to all settings (except when 1BBA and small role D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the winning number.
In this case, when the common 1BBA is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference in the advantageous section is won and 1BBB is in operation, it is determined that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. It is stipulated that when 1BBA and small part D having a setting difference in the advantageous section are overlapped and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add the advantageous section during operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during 1BBA operation, the winning probability of small role A is lower in setting 6 than setting 1, and the winning probability of small role E2 is set in setting 6 Higher than. For this reason, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to payout exceeding 150, the number of games (expected value) during the operation of 1BBA is larger in setting 6 than in setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if the replay D is selected so that the advantageous section is added, the expected value of the number of times that the replay D is won during the 1BBA operation is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a higher expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation than setting 1.
As described above, the operation end condition of 1 BBA is set to have paid out over 150 sheets. On the other hand, the expected number of payouts per game during 1 BBA operation is approximately “8.664” for setting 1 and approximately “8.557” for setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games that the payout number reaches 150 is about “17.3” in setting 1 and about “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to add the advantageous section unconditionally, the higher the set value, the easier the addition of the advantageous section. be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added each time a certain number of games elapses. Even in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during the operation of 1BBB.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is displayed. Goes to RT2. That is, it does not go through RT1 after the end of the operation of 1BBA.

  On the other hand, after the end of the operation of 1BBB, the process shifts to RT1, and stays at RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, the replay E is selected by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. Thereby, after the end of the 1BBB operation, the addition probability of the advantageous section becomes higher than after the end of the 1BBA operation. If the number of games added to the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the end of the 1BBA operation and after the end of the 1BBB operation.

  And, when the advantageous section is maintained and the process proceeds to RT1, until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function is not activated in the game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the pattern symbol Wait until appears. When a pattern symbol is displayed at RT1 and the process proceeds to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the transition is made to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, the small role 01 wins by operating the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group, and the pattern (unless there is a push order mistake) The symbol is never displayed. For this reason, when it transfers to RT1 during an advantageous area, it can also continue to stay at RT1 until an advantageous area is complete | finished. Not until the advantageous period ends, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group, and after the predetermined number of games, the game that can operate the instruction function until the pattern symbol is displayed ( For example, when the small role B group is won), the instruction function may not be operated, and the pattern symbol may be displayed.

Further, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 performs control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until a predetermined timing arrives. If it is a section or a standby section), the advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off.
When the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift to the advantageous section first, after the game decided to shift to the advantageous section ends (when all reels 31 stop and there is a payout, the medal The advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the medal insertion (betting) of the next game (after payout) becomes possible, and until the operation of the settlement switch 46 (the settlement processing operation) becomes possible when there is a stored medal. To control.

Secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB stops. Control to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the special combination is a special combination that carries the winning information to the next game such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only when a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, if the special role is valid only for games won such as SB or CB and the special information does not carry the winning information to the next game, it will be selected for the condition device that contains only the small role and replay. As in the case where the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on this, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (betting) becomes possible and until the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77.
In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77, firstly, “after the decision to move to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all Until the reel 31 is stopped and the medals of the next game after the medals have been paid out can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in this embodiment, as a general rule, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. Thereby, after deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it.

  In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example of this case. In this example, when the small role E1 is elected (single) and it is determined to shift to the advantageous zone based on the winning of the small role E1, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, it is always applied when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of a condition device that does not include 1BB that can be carried over after the next game.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is operated, the advantageous section starts. In this embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example of this case. In this example, when 1BBA and small role E1 are elected redundantly, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on this duplicated winning, the advantageous section display is displayed until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, until the moment when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (for example, when no standby section is provided).

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that includes the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed uniformly. When this is done, it may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Alternatively, even if it is a transition to an advantageous section based on the election of the conditional device including the special role, it is decided to move to the advantageous section uniformly based on the election of the conditional device not including the special role. Similarly to the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like.
In addition, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, other than the timing 1 and the timing 2 shown in FIG. In the next game of the game won for the special role, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reels 31 are rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning of the role is won) It may be.

  In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends with the next game of the game won for the special role). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated in a game after the next game of the game won for the special role and the special role can be won, at least a part of the reels 31 rotate. It may be during the middle or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends with the game in which the special role can be won). ).

Here, for example, when the small combination E1 is elected, the 59th “red 7”-“cherry”-“red 7” (FIG. 9) in the small combination 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that “Red 7” — “Rotating” — “Red 7” has stopped as a result of pinching in the game at the time of winning 1 BBA. Next, when the player aims at “cherry” when the middle reel 31 stops, but “cherry” does not stop on the active line (the kick control is controlled), the small role E1 is won in the game. You can see that it is not. In this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player knows that 1BBA is a single winner, and in the next game of the game at the time of 1BBA win, the 1BBA symbol It becomes possible to push the combination of. That is, lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a 1BBA winning notification. This is because it is not decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of losing (not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, etc., there is a tendency to give a 1BB winning notification after performing a continuous production (an effect that tells whether or not 1BB has been won). If it is turned on, such a continuous production is wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit until the winning 1BB wins. It was made to have.

On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small role E1”, if the winning of the small role E1 is given priority in the game, 1BBA is not won in the game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small role E1, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because a standby section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small role E1”, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit until the winning 1BBA wins, the small role E1. When the winning section is won, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1 BBA has not been repeatedly won.

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small role E1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), and the predetermined section is selected. A case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has elapsed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which one is adopted depends on, for example, the number at the time of winning “1BBA + small role E1”, or the advantageous zone when winning “1BBA + small role E1” (only when it is decided to move to the advantageous zone) A lottery (two-stage lottery) of whether or not the display LED 77 is immediately turned on (whether or not a standby section is provided) may be performed. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the 1BBA is not repeatedly won, and the player's expectation can be continuously felt.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small role E1 is set to “PB = 1”. Therefore, regardless of whether “1BBA + small role E1” is won or only when the small role E1 is alone, In the game, the small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) wins.
However, it is also possible to set the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 to “PB ≠ 1”. Then, when the small role included in the condition device of the small role E1 is set to “PB ≠ 1,” when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when “1BBA + small role E1” is won, It is possible to control that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing when winning, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even if the predetermined timing has passed when the small role E1 is not winning.

  However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always displayed by the predetermined timing. May be lit (always the timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be lit even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

Further, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of winning the small role D alone and at the time of winning the small role E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous interval display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (providing a waiting interval). Therefore, it becomes a so-called prompt notification and cannot expect the player's expectation.
Therefore, as described above, when the small combination E1 is elected alone, there are two advantageous intervals, that is, an advantageous interval that continues until the predetermined number of games is consumed, and an advantageous interval that is terminated by the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small combination B group winning. Set the type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, until the time of winning the first small role B group, production of expectation (whether or not it is an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is consumed) If the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player's expectation can be given thereafter. This is because, even when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is not known at the time when the advantageous section continues until the advantageous section has consumed the predetermined number of games.

Even when the small role E1 is elected alone, if it does not shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light in the first place, so that it is necessary to output a continuous effect (such as an effect indicating whether to move to the advantageous section) Absent.
In addition, when the above-mentioned condition device is won, the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is not set as the winning of the small role B group (one instruction function operation game) or the predetermined number of games. It is also possible to determine the number of actuations by a lottery, for example, within a range of 1 to 50 times.

  As a specific process for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, the eighth bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from “0” to “1”. Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, it is possible to store the data obtained by performing an OR operation on the previous segment data and “10000000” as new data in the RWM 53. As a result, the value corresponding to the segment DP in the segment data of the digit 2 is “1”.

In addition, as described above, the digits of the present embodiment include a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and a method for lighting these digits includes controlling as follows.
The main control board 50 executes “interrupt processing” every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main processing in addition to “(game progress) main processing” which is processing for repeating each game. In this interrupt processing, LED lighting control, reel 31 drive control, external signal transmission processing, and the like are performed. And in this embodiment, the dynamic lighting which lights one digit for every interrupt process is performed with respect to the digits 1-9. For example, only digit 1 is lit in the current interrupt process, and digit 2 is lit in the next interrupt process. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of one in nine interrupt processes. In addition, you may perform not only such dynamic lighting but static lighting which connected the signal line for every digit.

  Accordingly, the segment data is changed as described above when it is time to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes by interruption processing.

  Further, the advantageous section control means 69 activates the instruction function in a game in which the instruction function is to be activated in the advantageous section by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 to be described later. Push order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small combination B1 is won, push order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” in the present embodiment.

During the advantageous section, the instruction function operation game will be
1) Non-RT and RT1: When winning the small role C group (When winning the small role B group, the pattern function is displayed, so the instruction function is not activated.)
2) RT2: At the time of replay B group winning, at the time of small role B group winning, at the time of small role C group winning 3) RT3: At the time of replay C group winning, at the time of small role B group winning, and at the time of small role C group winning .

Further, as described above, when the small combination A is won, the instruction function is activated as a dummy. When winning the small role A, the small role 01 wins regardless of the push order, so no matter which push order is instructed, there will be no disadvantage to the player. It will not harm the fairness of
Specifically, when winning the small role A, it is possible to select any one of the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using a random number or the like.

  When the small role E1 is won when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the push order instruction number “A3” and displays the push order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the middle cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached.

  In the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small role E1 is elected, and the advantageous section is not added when the small role E2 is elected. The first right stop is displayed so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added at the time of winning the small role E1 in the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player an impression that the advantageous section is added by displaying the middle cherries. Accordingly, when it is not desired to display the middle cherries in a game where the advantageous section is not added (when the small role E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

  Further, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached (when the advantageous section cannot be added), either the winning of the small role E1 or the winning of the small role E2 is performed in order to prevent the middle cherries from being displayed. In addition, the right first stop is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to “1500 games”. For this reason, for example, when the small role E1 (and E2) is won when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes “1400 games” or more, the first right stop is displayed by operating the instruction function. .
As described above, the “operation of the instruction function” in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player, but in this embodiment, the appearance of the middle cherry is avoided. The display of the pressing order is also included in “Activation of the indication function”. Of course, such a case may not be included in the “operation of the instruction function”, and the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games related to the advantageous section (see FIG. 1).
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, “100”) determined at that time. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is consumed, and when it becomes “0”, the advantageous section is ended. Note that decrement may be performed from a game that has shifted to an advantageous section, or may be performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, “100”) determined at that time when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the 1BB game. An initial value may be set.
Further, when an advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

  For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is “55”, it is determined that the advantageous section is added, and when the number of added games is “30”, the count value is changed from “55” to “ 85 ". Each time one game is digested, “84”, “83”... Are decremented one by one.

  Further, when 1BBA is in operation (except for those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small part D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a is continued. The counting by is interrupted. In this embodiment, the reason is set as described above. During the 1BBA operation (except for the one based on the overlapping winning combination of the 1BBA and the small role D), it is possible to execute the addition of the advantageous section, but during the 1BBB operation, the advantageous section Since the addition is not executed, the setting is made as described above in order to balance the two (so that the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than the 1BBBA operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to continue counting by the advantageous section counter 69a even during the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, or the advantageous section counter during any operation of 1BBA and 1BBB. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

  On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, until the 1BBA or 1BBB wins (inside), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued. When 1BB is won or when it is notified that 1BB has been won, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even when the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when 1BB is won, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is informed until it is notified that 1BB has been won. You may make it decrement one game at a time.

In addition, there is a case where a condition device including 1BB in the normal section is won (such as overlapping winning of 1BBA and small role E1), and the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the winning of this condition device. In this case, a standby section is started from the next game (only when a standby section is provided), and the inside of 1BB is in progress.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is elected, it is in the advantageous section and inside 1BB, and the advantageous section is not added in the inside of 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, if the condition device that includes 1BB in the normal section is elected and the transition to the standby section has not yet made the transition to the advantageous section, a longer roll-off effect (notifies whether 1BB has been won or not) It is considered that it is not disadvantageous for the player even if the production is performed, for example, a continuous production over a plurality of games). This is because, during the waiting period, there is no advantageous period, so counting (decrement) by the advantageous period counter 69a and counting (decrement) by an upper limit counter 69b described later are not performed.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is elected and becomes inside, even after becoming inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a or an upper limit counter 69b to be described later Is counted (decremented). In this case, since it is not possible to add an advantageous section, it is preferable that the 1BB winning is notified early without performing an excessively long turn effect.
Specifically, for example, the average number of games of the former beat production is 4 games, and the average number of games of the latter beat production is 2 games.

  On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated at the time of the small role B group winning once in the small role E1, the advantageous section counter 69a counts in the advantageous section counter 69a. Do not set a value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small role B group is won. When the small role B group is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the current game, and the advantageous section is ended.

  In addition, when the operation number of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is preliminarily given as an ending condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small role B group is provided. “1” may be set. Then, when the instruction function is activated once at the time of winning the small role B group, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.

Note that it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag or the like and turning it “ON” during the advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 serves as an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied in this game, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is “0”, the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is “0”. ”Is executed.

  In addition, when it is decided that the small role E1 is elected alone and shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section where the number of games is fixed, or by the operation of the instruction function at the time of the single small role B group winning A lottery is performed as to whether to shift to an advantageous section that ends (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, how the probability is allocated between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when the small role E1 is elected alone and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect that indicates which advantageous section has been output is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, when winning the small role B group, after the instruction function is activated in the game, if it is an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function once, the advantageous section is terminated with the current game (advantageous). The section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when it has shifted to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued after the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is kept on).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small group B is won before reaching the predetermined number of games from the start of the advantageous section.

  Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section or when the advantageous section is started, “1500” is set), and thereafter, the advantageous counter is started. Until the end of the section, the count is not interrupted in any case, and the count value is decremented by “1” for each game. For example, counting is continued even during 1BB operation. This is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. The advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may be incremented from “0” by “1” for each game.

  Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the advantageous section control means 69 sets the advantageous section in the current game even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds “0” ( Compulsory) is terminated (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to “0”), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off (in the segment data of the digit 2, the eighth bit is updated to “0”). As described above, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous section. When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the advantageous section is ended even if the 1BB is operating.

In addition, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum payout number with the specified number of 3). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when winning the small role B group, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the small role B is once. Even if the instruction function operation game has not been executed at the time of winning the group, or even if the small role B group has never been won, the advantageous section is (forcedly) terminated in this game, and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off the light.
Further, referring to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b, the image display device 23 may display the number of remaining games or the number of digested games.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission means 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, the end of 1BB operation, or the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game and game end check process, and updates the external signal control number at the game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes different values depending on the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

  Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so that the value corresponds to the external signal control number. After the external signal flag is updated, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external concentration terminal board 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. The external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. In addition, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, in this embodiment, “00000001 (B)”. Therefore, the two-byte data obtained by combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually present) is an RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the production group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is type data, and the second control command is RWM 53, as in the above RT. Is stored in the data.

  Note that the control command transmission means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. For example, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraud. On the other hand, with respect to the accessory condition device number, there is no fear of the above fraud. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Further, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is selected in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the correct answer pressing order are acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when the condition device that is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct answer push order is selected, the push order instruction number is not acquired and stored in the RWM 53. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is “A0”. Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is “A0” except when the condition device having the correct push order in the advantageous section is selected.
Further, during a normal section or a standby section, even if a condition device having a correct pressing order is selected, the pressing order instruction number is not acquired and stored in the RWM 53.

Then, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order in the advantageous section is selected, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80.
The control command transmission means 71 transmits the information “A0” as the pressing order instruction number except when the condition device having the correct pressing order in the advantageous section is selected.
Furthermore, when not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. In addition, when it is not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 may uniformly transmit the push order instruction number “A0”. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control such as RT number, push order instruction number, effect group number, and accessory condition device number. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked, or turned off) The specific effects such as what kind of sound is output from the speaker 22 and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23 are determined by lottery.

  Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous section, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when winning a small role B1 in a game in an advantageous section and receiving a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, the correct left push order “Left first stop” or “1- ○ Informs the player that the player can easily know the correct pressing order, such as “-○”. Note that when the push order instruction number “A0” is received in the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the production group number does not include information on which condition device is actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the production group number “5” is received, it is impossible for the sub-control board 80 to know which of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. . However, it can be known whether the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying the symbol of “bell” or lighting the frame lamp with “yellow” which is the corresponding color of “bell”.

Here, when winning the small role A, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, the small role 01 always wins, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to produce a bell (yellow) effect before the is operated.
On the other hand, when winning the small role group B or the small role group C during the normal section, a bell (yellow) effect may be performed when winning of the small role 01 is confirmed, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after the second stop switch 42 is operated or after the third stop switch 42 is operated.

However, if the output timing of the production at the time of winning the small role A and the output timing of the production at the time of winning the small role B group or the small role C group are different, Since it is possible to discriminate whether the winning combination is the small role B group or the small role C group, it is possible to count the winning number of the small role A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when winning the small role A in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated, for example, at the same timing as the correct answer in the pressing order when the small role B group or the small role C group is won. Then, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when any of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won, a control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. . In this way, the effect group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are made the same (“5”), and the sub control board 80 that receives the effect group number, for example, the first stop switch If it is designed to output the production at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the production group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are made different ("5" to "7"). Design that is more efficient than the case of the case (in the latter case, when any production group number of “5” to “7” is received, the production is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example. The efficiency is poor).

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the production group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (the operation of the instruction function (on the main side). ))), And is a time chart showing notification of correct pressing order by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub-side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the lottery unit 61 draws the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined. Further, when it is during the advantageous section, the push order instruction number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined.

  Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 the control commands of the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the production group number, and the accessory condition device number. When the sub control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, when in the advantageous section, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number by the operation of the instruction function.

  In “Example 1” in FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, first, the push order instruction information is displayed by the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50. Thereafter, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated in response to the reception of the accessory condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. Both the display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer push order is so-called three choices (first stop), the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated to notify the correct push order by the image display device 23. It is going to be. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called six choices, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 is performed until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Note that, as in this embodiment, even if the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, and thus the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23 is terminated. It goes without saying that effects other than the correct answer pressing order, for example, image display (character display etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section are continued.

Furthermore, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 is until the winning determination is performed on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct pressing order is three choices as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquisition number display LED 78 after the display of the pressing order instruction information is “00” (the upper and lower digits are “0”), “* 0” (the upper digit is turned off (*), and the lower digit is “ 0 "is displayed)," ** "(the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off),"-"(both the upper digit and the lower digit are turned on only for the segment G), and the like.

  In “Example 2” of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the main control board 50, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, and then the effect group The number and the equipment condition device number are transmitted. After receiving the production group number and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order.

  In “Example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number, the production group number, and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 displays the correct push order on the image display device 23. After that, at the moment (or immediately before) the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function. In Example 1 and Example 2 above, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the push order instruction information) is performed at a timing earlier than the notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80. . On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the pressing order instruction information).

  “Example 4” in FIG. 25 performs the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80 at substantially the same timing. . In the case of controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after “N” ms have elapsed since the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order instruction). The sub-control board 80 controls to start notifying the correct pressing order after “N” ms have elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. Can be mentioned.

24 and 25 show four examples, it is preferable that the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) is performed after the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. . In addition, it is preferable to perform push order notification by the sub-control board 80 side after the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when an incorrect push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, or the sub control board 80 notifies a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the push order instruction information has already been displayed by the main control board 80, the player notices an error in notification by the sub-control board 80, and the player is not disadvantaged. Absent.
Further, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination time, but may be performed until the third reel 31 is stopped.

  Next, the case where the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) and notification of the correct push order are performed will be described in more detail. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from the top to the bottom in the figure), the display of the acquired number display LED 78, and a notification example of the image display device 23. Note that the example of FIG. 26 is the timing corresponding to “Example 1” of FIG.

In the instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 26, an example in which the small combination B1 is won is shown. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. In the example of FIG. 26, an example of displaying “1OO” is shown.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, in the correct answer push order, the image display device 23 indicates that the push order is correct. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the image display in the correct push order is deleted.
In the present embodiment, the correct / incorrect push order is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42. Therefore, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification (image display) regarding the correct push order is terminated. In the case of 6 choices, it is possible to continue to notify the correct pressing order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

  In the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is continued until the winning determination is made (the same applies to the example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the instruction function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated in the same manner as the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23, for example, when the incorrect answer pressing order is reached. . In addition, as in this embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, an instruction is given when the first stop switch 42 is operated (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

  However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after the notification by the image display device 23 is stopped. This is to prevent the push order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be ended simultaneously with the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the push order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct push order.
However, if the push order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the push order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

  When all the reels 31 are stopped, a winning determination is performed. Here, when the small role 01 wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the display “= 1” of the push order instruction information. It changes to “09” shown. It should be noted that “01” is displayed when one winning combination is won due to a pressing order error, etc., and “00” (or “**”) is displayed when missing a winning combination. It should be noted that “= 1” → “00” (“00” is displayed to reset the display once) from the display “= 1” of the push order instruction information to the display of the medal payout number “09”. ) → “09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, “= 1” → “**” (the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off to reset the display once) → “09” may be displayed.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or caresses the medal and bets the medal, the displayed content is changed to “00” in order to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. (It may be “**”).

In FIG. 1, management information control means 72 is means for controlling (storage, computing, displaying, etc.) management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Advantageous sector ratio (cumulative)
(2) Consecutive character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Ratio of consecutive assets (cumulative)
(5) Property ratio (cumulative)
(See FIG. 38 described later).

First, the “favorable section ratio (the ratio of staying in the advantageous section)” means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Ratio). For example, in the game section with “10000” games, when the number of games in the advantageous section is “7000”, the advantageous section ratio is “70 (%)”.
In this embodiment, one set is set to “400” number of games. Then, a total of 15 sets, that is, “6000” number of games is set as “total”, and each ratio at “6000” number of games is calculated.

  Furthermore, “cumulative” refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been counted so far, and in this embodiment, is counted for the purpose of at least “175000” number of games. When the total number is less than “175000” games, the total value is displayed by blinking display, for example. When the total number is “175000” or more, the total value is displayed by lighting display, for example. The cumulative total continues to be added until reaching a value (upper limit value) that can be stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 even after the number of “175000” games has been reached.

“Consecutive character ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first type special character (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “refers to the number of medals acquired during operation of 1 BB with respect to the total number of medals acquired.
For example, when the number of medals earned in the “6000” number of games is “2000”, and the number of medals earned when the “first class special feature (RB)” is “500”, The item ratio (6000 games) is “25 (%)”.

Further, the “community ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals earned at the time of the actuating to the total number of medals acquired. Here, in addition to the above-mentioned first type special character, the “character” is a second type special character (CB), 2BB (second type special character continuous operation device, CB is continuously operated), SB (Single Bonus) is included.
And in this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, an accessory ratio becomes the same value as a continuous accessory ratio.

  27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a part of the storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, a 4-digit numerical value starting with “F” indicates an address of the RWM 53. For each address, a 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided.

  First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data relating to an advantageous section. As information relating to the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of a value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, the total number of games, and an advantageous section ratio. The storage area for the value corresponding to the advantageous section game frequency is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the advantageous section ratio The storage area is 1 byte (“F008”).

In this embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by one every time one game is consumed.
On the other hand, in the advantageous section, every time one game is consumed, a value obtained by multiplying the value of the advantageous section game number by 100 (referred to as “advantageous section game number corresponding value”) is added. For this reason, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games.

The purpose of this embodiment is to store at least “175000” times or more as the total number of games. This is to display the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio when the total number of games is “175,000” or more.
Here, since “175000 (D)” is “18” digits in binary, it can be stored in 3 bytes of “24” digits.

When it is assumed that the total number of games “175000 (D)” is an advantageous zone, the value corresponding to the advantageous zone game frequency is “175000 × 100” (D), which is “25 digits in binary number”. Therefore, 3 bytes of “24” digits are not enough, but 4 bytes of “32” digits can be stored.
For the reasons described above, the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes.

As for the total number of games, “1” is added for each game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also good.
On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio is “100 (D)” at the maximum value, and the value is “7” digits in binary, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

The total number of games is updated every game, the number of games, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3-byte full, that is, “FFFFFF (H)”, decimal number about 16.78 million), The count ends at that time, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of times of advantageous section games is incremented by “+100” for each game in the advantageous section, but even if it is assumed that all games are advantageous sections, the value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full. It is possible to count up to. Then, when the counting of the total number of games is finished, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is also finished.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by “advantageous section game count corresponding value / total number of games” (as will be described later, subtraction is actually performed and no division is performed). Since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is a value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle a decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. This makes it possible to calculate.
In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is stored as an integer, and the fractional part is rounded down. For example, when the total number of games is “1100 (D)” and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is “56000 (D)”, the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, and “F008” includes “ “00110010 (B)” is stored.

  The advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number and the total number of games, You may memorize | store in "F008". Then, a decimal value based on the value stored in “F008” is displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data relating to the total payout number. When medals are paid out by winning a small role, the value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) composed of 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (upper digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”).
Each 2-byte data stores the number of payouts between 400 games. For example, when nine winning combinations win and nine payouts are made, “9 (D)” is added to the total payout number.
Here, in the regular slot machine, the maximum payout number in one game is determined to be “15” or less, and assuming that there are 15 payouts per game, “6000” in 400 games. It becomes. Since “6000 (D)” is 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, when there is a payout from the first game to the 400th game, the payout number is stored in the 01th set (“F012” and “F011”). From the 401th game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the 02th set (“F014” and “F013”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for a total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing the total number of payouts for 15 sets, that is, 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 coins are paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to a value of “90000 (D)”, but “90000 (D)” is 17 digits in binary, It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15 sets, the total payout number at the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in “F031” to “F02F”.
When the 6000th game is reached, the number of payouts for 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (2 bytes each), so the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is also Moreover, it becomes the total value for 6000 games.
Next, when moving to the 6001 game, the first set of 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) is cleared, and the total payout number from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. Go. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total payout number (3-byte data) of the 15 sets is maintained without change.

Then, when the 6400 game is completed and the addition to the 01th set of 2-byte data is completed, the total payout number for the 15th set is calculated (additional 2-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is added), The total payout number of the calculated 15 sets is updated.
In the same way as above, after the 6401 game, the second set of 2-byte data (“F014” and “F013”) is cleared when the 6401 game is entered, and the 6401 game to the 6800th game are stored in this buffer. The total number of payouts is stored.
In the above method, the total payout number for 15 sets is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout number for 15 sets is calculated, You may update to that value.

The total number of payouts (cumulative) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts. The total of the number of payouts is obtained in order to calculate each ratio when the number of games is 175000 games or more (such as a continuous character operation ratio described later). However, the cumulative payout number is continuously stored even after 175,000 games have elapsed, and the update ends when the storage capacity of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full).
If it is assumed that every game of 155,000 times and 15 medals are paid out, the binary number is 22 digits, so that it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer that stores data related to the number of payouts related to the consecutive character in the RWM 53.
As shown in FIG. 29, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas composed of 3-byte data (for example, the 01st set is “F043 (most significant digit)” to “F041 (lowest digit)”). .

Each 3-byte data stores a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out at the time of continuous character operation by 100 (referred to as “value corresponding to the number of payouts”). For example, when the 10 winning combinations are won and 10 payouts are made during continuous action, “+1000” is set as the payout number corresponding value.
The reason why the value multiplied by 100, not the value of the number of payouts itself, is stored for the same reason as the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. This is because it is calculated as follows.

Furthermore, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts when 400 consecutive games are activated. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous character operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01th set (“F043” to “F041”). To do. For the next 401th game to 800th game, the payout number correspondence value is stored in the 02th set (“F046” to “F044”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
If it is assumed that 15 medals are paid out for each game in 400 games, the payout number corresponding value is “600000 (D)”, and this value is 20 digits in binary, so 3 bytes Can be memorized.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) of values corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out at the time of operation of a continuous accessory for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a value corresponding to the number of payouts between 6000 games.
If it is assumed that 15 medals are paid out in each game in 6000 games, the payout number corresponding value is “9000000 (D)”, and this value is 24 digits in binary number, so 3 bytes. It can be memorized.

For example, until the first fifteenth set, “F070” to “F06E” store the number corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous actor operation at the number of games less than 6000 games. When the 6000th game is reached, the payout number correspondence values between 400 games are stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (each 3 bytes). In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous feature is activated for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is a total value for 6000 games.
When the game shifts to the 6001 game, the first set of 3-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the number of payouts in the continuous action from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. The corresponding value is memorized. In addition, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of paid-out coins for the continuous character actuating for 15 sets in total is maintained without being changed.

  And when it becomes 6400 games and the 3-byte data of the 01th set is determined, the value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out during the continuous operation of the 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated). (Addition), and the calculated value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous feature activation for the total of 15 sets is updated.

In the same way as above, after the 6401 game, the 3rd byte data (“F046” to “F044”) of the 02th set is cleared when moving to the 6401 game, and the 6401th game to the 6800th game are stored in this buffer. Until then, the 3rd byte data of the 02th set is updated.
In addition, in the above method, the value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the consecutive feature works for the total of 15 sets is updated every 400 games. However, when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, A value corresponding to the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous actor operation (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character actuating. This is for calculating the continuous character operating ratio when the game is 175000 games or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character activation is stored even after 175,000 games have elapsed, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit (4 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 15 medals continue to be paid out for each game, every game “1500 (D)” continues to be added. Therefore, in 4 bytes, about 2.86 million games can be stored.

  In addition, the continuous character actuating ratio (6000 games) (“F075”) is a value corresponding to the number of paying out coins during continuous actuating operation of “6000 games (“ F070 ”to“ F06E ”) / total payout number of 6000 games (FIG. 28). Among these, it is a buffer for storing values of “F031” to “F02F”).

In addition, the continuous character actuating ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is calculated as “cumulative consecutive character actuating payout number corresponding value (“ F074 ”to“ F071 ”) / total payout number (“ F034 ”in FIG. 28). ”To“ F032 ”).
Since the above ratio stores the decimal value up to the maximum value “100 (D)”, it can be stored in one byte.
In addition, although the continuous character operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous character operation ratio (cumulative) can be updated every game, for example, when a display request for these ratios is made, the calculation is performed. The calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”) and the value may be displayed.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer that stores data relating to the number of paid-out items in the RWM 53. As is apparent from a comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts for a feature is also provided in the same manner as a buffer for storing a value corresponding to the number of payout for a continuous character. The buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts for the bonus items has the same structure as the buffer for storing the value for the number of payouts for the continuous feature.

That is, for each 400 games, 15 sets of storage areas capable of storing 3 bytes of data each as a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of actuating, and a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of actuating the total of 6000 games (15 sets). A 3-byte buffer for storing, and a 4-byte buffer for storing a value corresponding to the total number of payouts at the time of actuating an accessory. In addition, there are two types of buffers (1 byte) for storing an accessory operating ratio, one for 6000 games and one for accumulation.
Since the storage method in each of these buffers is the same as in the case of the continuous character operation, the description thereof is omitted.

Note that since the consecutive combination corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out during the 1BB operation, the value is stored in the corresponding number of payouts at the time of continuous combination operation shown in FIG.
In addition, when the medals are paid out during the operation of all the winnings including the consecutive winnings, the bonuses are stored in the payout number corresponding value at the time of the winning action shown in FIG.
Here, in this embodiment, only 1BB (and RB) which is a continuous accessory is provided as the accessory, and in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. The value stored in the buffer shown in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes for each of the 01th set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of 15 sets is stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating the total value of 15 sets is the same as in FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, from the 1st game to the 6000th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in 3 bytes of each of the 01 set to the 15th set as in FIG.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the value corresponding to the total payout number from the first game to the 6000th game, the calculation is performed by adding the respective 3-byte data from 01 set to 15 sets.

Next, the payout number corresponding values from the 6001th game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”).
When the 6401th game is reached, the first set of 3 byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the payout number corresponding value from the 6401th game to the 6800th game is changed to 01 set of 3 byte data. I will remember it.

When calculating the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) between 6401 games and 6800 games, the calculation is performed by adding 3 byte data of 02 sets to 16 sets.
Further, when the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) is calculated when 6800 games are reached, the calculation is performed by adding 3 bytes of data of 1 set to 15 sets.
In this way, the 3 byte buffer of any one of the 16 sets is set as the currently updated 3 byte buffer, and the other 15 bytes of the 3 byte buffer are calculated for the total number of payouts for 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Even when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared), the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. The Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, the power switch 11 is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (turned 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is turned off. Can be migrated. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change described above is executed before the set value can be changed (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized but is maintained.
Here, the “unrecoverable error” refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode described above is performed. For example,
1) When the read set value is not within the range of settings 1 to 6 (abnormal setting value),
2) As a result of determining the stop symbol, if a symbol that should not be displayed (kick symbol) is displayed (design combination error)
3) Random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process,
4) When the power-off recovery data is not normal.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data in each buffer, setting value information, RT information, winning condition device information in FIGS. 27 to 30) is cleared. Then, a set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.

On the other hand, the “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning the power switch 11 on and off. For example, a medal clogging error, medal retention error, medal illegal passing error, passage sensor 43a abnormality, insertion sensor 44 abnormality, payout sensor 37 abnormality, medal abnormality insertion error, and the like can be mentioned.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error process is displayed and the main process is stopped, but if the hall clerk performs an error canceling operation (removing the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, the error has been cancelled. If it is determined whether or not the error has been canceled, the process is resumed.

Subsequently, an update process of the advantageous section game count corresponding value and the total game count will be described. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37 below, the advantageous zone game count corresponding value is abbreviated as “advantageous zone corresponding value”.
FIG. 32 is an example in which the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games are updated using a register. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of the dotted line surrounded part, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 of a part. FIG. 36 shows an example in which the value corresponding to the advantageous section game count and the total game count are updated without using a register.

  FIG. 32 is executed at the end of each game, for example, the game. In the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use the A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games (data “F007” in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of “F006” and “F005” in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper 2 bytes (data of “F004” and “F003” in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower 2 bytes (data of “F002” and “F001” in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game count lower 2 byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding “1” in step S105. For example, when the lower 2 bytes of data are “FFFF (H)” before the start of this flowchart, an overflow occurs due to addition of “1” in step S105 (a flag register (F register built in the main CPU 55). ) Carry flag becomes “1”). When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that no overflow has occurred (carry flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S109. Note that after adding “1” in step S105, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in step S106. Therefore, at the time of step S106, the DE register value when the overflow has occurred is “0”. "
In this embodiment, the “0” bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

  In step S107, “1” is added to the upper 1-byte register of the total number of games, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the “upper limit” means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games in this embodiment is counted as 3 bytes, when 3 bytes are full, specifically when the value is “FFFFFF (H)”, no further addition is possible. It is determined that the upper limit has been reached. Note that after adding “1” to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag = “1”). is there. It can be paraphrased when the value of the A register becomes “0” (when the zero flag = “1”). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

  Therefore, when the total number of games in this embodiment is 3 bytes full, and when it is about 16.78 million decimal numbers, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the game of FIG. 32 is executed every game, but every game, “Yes” is determined in step S108, and this flowchart is ended.

When the process proceeds from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. It is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on when the advantageous section is in effect and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on or off. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “1”. It is.
When it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S110, “100 (D)” is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the advantageous interval game number corresponding value, that is, the HL register value in this example. In step S111, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred. In this embodiment, during the advantageous interval, “100 (D)” is added in increments. Therefore, overflow occurs in 2 bytes because “FFDC (H) (65500 (D))” is “100 (D ) ”Is added to“ 0040 (H) (65600 (D)) ”. When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112. When it is determined that no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, “1” is added to the upper 2-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. In step S113, the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in “F004” to “F001” in FIG. Thereby, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (RWM53) is updated. In the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in “F007” to “F005” in FIG. Thereby, the total number of games (RWM53) is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full, the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number does not become 4 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted about 16.78 million times, but assuming that all the total number of games is an advantageous section, even if the value of about 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, This is because 4-byte full is not reached. Therefore, in step S112, even if “1” is added to the upper 2 byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, correct arithmetic processing is realized without determining whether or not overflow has occurred. And simplification of arithmetic processing can be realized.

  Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. When it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is calculated. The processing according to this flowchart is terminated without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in “F007” to “F005” of the RWM 53 remains “FFFFFF (H)”. There is no change in the data of the total number of games.

Next, a specific example of processing in steps S109 to S114 will be described in FIG.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of steps in the meantime. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as those in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S121, the value of the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written in “F004” and “F003” in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written in “F002” and “F001” in FIG.
Next, when proceeding to step S123, the total number of games is updated in batches for 3 bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in “F007”, “F006”, and “F005”, respectively, in FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as those in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S131, the advantageous zone game count corresponding value is updated in batches of 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001”, respectively, in FIG. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated in batches of 3 bytes as in the first specific example.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. In FIG. 35, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step of FIG. 35 is the same as that of FIG. 35 is different from FIG. 34 in that even if it is determined in step S109 that it is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S131, and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is updated. In other words, in this case, “100 (D)” is not added to the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, but based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in step S103 and step S104 in FIG. In FIG. 27, “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001” are written. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples in which the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of times of advantageous game are updated through (using) a register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 shows an example in which the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous games are updated without using a register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, “1” is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. Specifically, “1” is added to the data “F006” and “F005” in FIG.

  In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding “1” to the data “F006” and “F005”, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1”. The determination may be made based on whether or not the data of “F006” and “F005” has become “0000 (H)”. When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, “1” is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. Specifically, “1” is added to the data “F007” in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. In this determination, it is determined whether or not “F007” overflows due to the addition of “1” in step S203 and the carry flag is set to “1”, and the carry flag is set to “1”. If it is, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. It may be determined whether the data of “F007” has become “0 (H)”, and when it has become “0 (H)”, it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, “1” is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, the upper 1 byte overflows in the addition in step S203 and becomes “0 (H)”. Therefore, by subtracting “1” from this value, in step S203 The data before adding “1”, that is, “FF (H)” is returned.
In step S206, “1” is also subtracted from the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. As a result, the values of “F006” and “F005” become “FFFF (H)”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. This determination is similar to step S109 in FIG. And when it is judged that it is not in an advantageous section, since it is not necessary to update the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, “100 (D)” is added to the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, “F002” and “F001” in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value “100 (D)” to the RWM 53, the data “F002” and “F001” are first stored in the HL register. Then, the result of adding the value “100 (D)” to the HL register is stored in “F002” and “F001”, thereby updating the data of “F002” and “F001”.

  In the next step S209, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the calculation of step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1”. When the carry flag is “1”, it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S209 that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210. If it is determined that no overflow has occurred, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S210, “1” is added to the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, “F004” and “F003” in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Next, an advantageous section ratio calculation process will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are stored, in order to calculate the ratio of advantageous sections, simply “value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games / total number of games” is simply calculated. Can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only perform an operation with 2 bytes, and cannot perform a division of a numerical value with 2 bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the advantageous section game count corresponding value = x and the total game count = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a−y = b (> 0)
b−y = c (> 0)
cy = d (<0)
As described above, since the number of times “> 0 (greater than“ 0 ”)” is “3” as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y, the quotient of “x ÷ y” is “3”. It can be calculated that there is. In this embodiment, the fractional part is rounded down, and in the above example, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as “3”.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an advantageous interval ratio calculation process.
First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in a register. Similarly to the above, seven registers A, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of “F001” to “F007” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores data of “F007” D register: Stores data of “F006” E register: Stores data of “F005” B register: Stores data of “F004” C register: Stores data of “F003” H register: Stores data of “F002” L register: Stores data of “F001”

Next, proceeding to step S302, the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. In this process, the data stored in “F008” in FIG. 27 is cleared (set to “0”).
In step S303, the lower byte is subtracted. In this process, the data stored in the DE register (the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) is subtracted from the data stored in the HL register (the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game times), and the operation result is obtained. Store in the HL register.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred. As a result of the calculation in step S303 (a result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), when the carry flag is not raised (when the carry flag ≠ “1”), it is determined as “No”.
When it is determined that the carry flag is set (there is a carry), the process proceeds to step S305, and when it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value is “0”. When it is “0”, since the subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, “1” is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (the upper 1 byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the BC register value (the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. In step S308, it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than “0”, that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. If the carry flag is set, “Yes” is determined in step S308, and no further subtraction is possible, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (favorable section ratio) stored in “F008” is stored in the HL register, and “1” is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. In step S311, the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303, and the above processing (subtraction) is repeated.
Through the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is incremented by “1” for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section ratio calculated from the advantageous section game number correspondence value and the total number of games stored in “F001” to “F007” is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, every time the processing of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. That is, the number of executions (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous section ratio.

  In the above, the quotient of the advantageous section game number corresponding value (value obtained by multiplying the advantageous section game number by 100) and the total number of games is calculated and used as the advantageous section ratio (%). (Repetition of subtraction) calculates the continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative). be able to.

  Specifically, 6000 games (15 sets) corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous action (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total payout numbers of 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28). , “F031” to “F02F”), by repeating the same subtraction as described above, the quotient of “corresponding number of coins to be paid out during continuous character operation for 6000 games / total number of coins to be paid out for 6000 games” is calculated. The value is stored as “F075” in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory operating ratio (6000 games).

  In addition, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the total payout number of the total payout (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), The quotient of “corresponding value of the total number of payouts at the time of continuous consecutive object operation / total number of payouts at the total” is calculated, and the value is stored as “F076” in FIG.

  Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of paid-out 6000 games during operation (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total paid-out number of 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). , The quotient of “corresponding value for the number of payouts at the time of operation of 6000 games divided by the total number of payouts of 6000 games” is calculated, and the value is stored as “F0B5” in FIG. .

  Further, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the actuating operation (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the total payout number (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), The quotient of “corresponding value for the number of payouts at the time of operating the object ÷ total number of payouts for the total” is calculated, and the value is stored as “F0B6” in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the “advantageous section ratio”, “continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, “character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, “continuous characters” calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of "ratio (cumulative)" and "community ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by information type and numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are examples, and are not limited to these pieces of information. Information other than these pieces of information may be displayed, or some of the pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed. Only information may be displayed. Further, the display order is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The management information is displayed as described above for the following reason.
In the case of amusement machines, installation of halls is permitted if it conforms to the type test specified by the Feisei Law. Here, in the type test, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate when the 6000 game is executed do not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the bonus rate and 60% for the continuous bonus rate). There are established rules.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document stating the average value of the ratio of the applied game machines and the continuous character ratio will be attached. May be required).

In this case, the hall clerk or a third party can easily check whether the gaming machine installed in the hall is a gaming machine with the same specifications as that to which the gaming machine fits (whether it is fraudulent). It is hoped that.
For example, a gaming machine that has a value that deviates from a suitable gaming machine may be different from the matching gaming machine. In this case, request confirmation of the gaming machine from the manufacturer. Therefore, fraud etc. can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it can be easily and surely confirmed whether or not the information matches.

  In the present embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on), the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is during so-called setting confirmation. For this reason, the set value display LED 73 displays the current set value. Since the setting confirmation is different from the setting change, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

In this embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during the setting confirmation, the “advantageous section ratio” is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is “50 (%)”, and “50” is displayed in the digits 7 and 8. Therefore, “U750” is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
In addition, when displaying the numerical value of management information, it is a decimal number notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, “continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “45”. (%) ”.
Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of “actual object ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “60 (% ) ”Is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, “Continuous character ratio (cumulative)” is displayed, and “A6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “48 (%)”. it's shown.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of “actual material ratio (cumulative)” is displayed, and “A7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “52 (%)”. it's shown.
Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section “U750” is displayed.
Further, the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain time (for example, 10 seconds). When the setting switch 13 is pressed after the light is turned off, the advantageous section ratio “U750”, which is the first display, is displayed.

While the door switch 15 detects the opening of the front door, the management information is continuously displayed (the digits 6 to 9 are continuously lit), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. In some cases, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on, or the door switch 15 When the opening of the front door is detected, the digits 6 to 9 are not turned on, and the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on.

Regardless of whether or not opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is every 1500 interrupts). 38), the display contents shown in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on a set value such as a continuous character ratio.
On the other hand, when the hall is open (when the player can play), the possibility of opening the front door is high.
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector.
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that a medal has accumulated in the payout port of the hopper 35.
d) An error that occurs when the hopper 35 is full of medals (the sub-storage that is provided next to the hopper 35 and stores medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full). Error) and the like.

When such an error occurs, if the hall official opens the front door, the player may see the management information and guess the set value. In order to solve such a situation, when all of the errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occur, the management information display LED 74 is not lit. It is desirable to configure so that the light is extinguished. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned errors a) to d), and can be configured not to perform the lighting display by the management information display LED 74 when other errors occur.
In addition, when the above-mentioned non-recoverable error occurs, there is a doubt about the authenticity of the management information to be displayed, and after canceling the non-recoverable error, the data that is the basis of the management information to be displayed is cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display.

  In order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened. If the front door is opened, a door open error will always occur. You can display the information.

Further, the above information types “U7”, “y6”, “y7”, “A6”, “A7” are examples, and arbitrary display is performed by a two-digit alphabet, symbol, numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Moreover, in the above example, the numerical examples differing between the continuous character ratio and the character ratio have been shown. It becomes.

  When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode shifts to the management information display mode, and “U7 (advantageous section) The segment data indicating “Ratio” is read and displayed in digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if “U7” is displayed, the segment data is “00111110 (B)” and “00100111 (B)”.

  Further, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, the data stored in “F008” is “00110010”. When the value is converted into segment data, “01101101 (B)” and “00111111 (B)” are obtained.

  Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is read to determine whether or not the total number of games has reached “175000 (D)”. When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached “175000”, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached “175000”, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit up. In this way, the display pattern is made different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached “175000 games”.

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, display is performed in a pattern in which the light is turned off and turned on at intervals of “0.5 seconds”, the turn-off time is “0.5 seconds”, and the turn-on time is repeated “1 second”. Display with a pattern. Compared to the case where the turn-off time and the turn-on time are set to the same time, if the turn-on time is longer than the turn-off time, the management information display time can be lengthened and the lighting of the hall etc. is dim. Visibility can be improved even under circumstances.
Since it is only necessary to change the display pattern so that it can be determined whether or not the game has reached “175000”, the display is not limited to blinking or lighting, for example, “U7” (“ For example, “U1” (less than “175000” game) may be displayed. Alternatively, “U7” may be blinked when the game is less than “175000”, and the numerical value may be lit.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the consecutive character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), if the total number of games does not reach “6000” games, respectively, The numerical value of the percentage of an accessory is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached “6000” games, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the consecutive character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. It is read and it is determined whether or not the “6000” game has been reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Similarly, in the case of displaying the continuous character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games does not reach “175000”, the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and The numerical value of the ratio of totals (cumulative) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached “175000”, the numerical values of the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative) are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the display pattern has been reached, and the display pattern is varied according to the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive character ratio, and the character ratio in such a manner that it can be discriminated whether or not it is 6000 games or more and whether or not it is 175,000 games or more (for example, different display modes). Has the following merits.
For example, when determining whether or not an illegal gaming machine is based on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous component ratio, and management ratio management information, how many games the management information has If it is referred to whether it is the value with respect to, it will become possible to judge more accurately whether it is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of game machine type application.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%) with 175,000 games or more, the judgment as to whether it is fraud is different. . There is a possibility that the value of the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in 175,000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, and it is considered that the value has converged. For this reason, it can be judged that the latter has a high possibility of fraud.

Thus, even if they are the same value, the greater the number of games, the more the value converges to the design value. More accurate judgment can be made.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the display is blinking. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the total number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be blinking.

  In the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, the management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78. Is possible. By setting in this way, it is not necessary to provide the digits 6 to 9 separately, so that the cost is reduced.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the storage number display LED 76.
In the example of FIG. 39, an example having nine medals as credits is shown. For this reason, initially, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is “09”.
Even when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is not changed (because a door open error is displayed by an acquisition number display LED 78 described later).

  When the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays “U7” indicating an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left unattended, “U7” and “50” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the storage number display LED 76 displays “y6” indicating “continuous character ratio (6000 games)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “45” of “continuous character ratio (6000 games)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “y6” and “45” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, an arrow is shown so as to shift from “50” display to “y6” display. However, even if the setting switch 13 is pressed while “U7” is displayed, “y6” is displayed. Of course, the same applies to the other figures.

  Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y6” or “45” is displayed, “y7” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 to indicate that “the ratio of bonuses (6000 games)”. When the predetermined time elapses, the numerical value “60” of the “role ratio (6000 games)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “y7” and “60” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y7” or “60” is displayed, “A6” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 to indicate “continuous character ratio (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “48” of “continuous character ratio (cumulative)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “A6” and “48” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “A6” or “48” is displayed, “A7” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 to indicate “a ratio of accumulated items (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “52” of the “composition ratio (cumulative)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “A7” and “52” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the first advantageous section ratios “U7” and “50”.
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off during the display as described above, the storage number display is switched to “09”.

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the acquisition number display LED 78.
In the example of FIG. 40, an example is shown in which “09” is displayed as the number of acquisitions.
When the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, “dE” indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the number-of-acquisition display LED 78 displays “U7” indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left unattended, “U7” and “50” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content “dE” is displayed again (the door open error cannot be solved by simply closing the front door). In order to eliminate this error display, an error canceling operation is performed. For example, an error is canceled by inserting a door key into a key hole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error canceling operation is performed in this manner, the acquisition number display LED 78 again displays the acquisition number “09” before “dE” display.

  In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games “6000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of games “175000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed blinking.

Second Embodiment
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (or the main control board 50B when divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) are always displayed. The lighting state is set.
There are various ways of displaying the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when the lamp is always lit. For example, the management information to be displayed is updated every five seconds. Specifically, “U750” (display for 5 seconds) → “y645” (display for 5 seconds) →... “A752” (display for 5 seconds) → “U750” (display for 5 seconds) →. Can be mentioned. A digit turn-off time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base body 1 with a “front door opening / closing shaft” (left side in the drawing) in FIG. 41 as a support shaft. FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, but the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power source unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are accommodated in the base body 1.
Further, the sub control board 80 is attached to the left side surface of the inner surface side of the base body 1. On the other hand, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 accommodated in the substrate case 16 are attached to the back surface inside the inner surface of the base body 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are attached above the symbol display device so that the state of the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily confirmed visually when the front door is opened. In order to do so, it is attached to a relatively easy-to-see position in the base body 1.
For this reason, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can be confirmed relatively easily visually.

In the specification of the slot machine 10, in addition to a system in which medals are automatically supplied to the hopper 35a when medals in the hopper 35 run out, the hall clerk opens the front door each time the hopper 35 runs out of medals. A method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, since the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 when the front door is opened, the player can view the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the advantageous section ratio, the continuous feature ratio, etc. of the table that the player is currently playing. For this reason, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but is not easily seen by the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 in (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one piece, and Example 2 in (b) is made up of two main control boards in the form of 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is arranged on the left side as much as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening / closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure. Therefore, if the management information display LED 74 is arranged as far left as possible when viewed from the front, the front door can be opened. , It becomes difficult to see from the player.

  In the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50 </ b> B, but is located on the left side in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is increased. 42, when the position of the management information display LED 74 is set to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. 42 (also in FIG. 3), the caulking portion 16a Is the right end of the substrate case 16.
In this way, even if the caulking portion 16a is destroyed and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 is damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. Can be more effectively prevented.

  The caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is opened. In addition to the caulking portion 16a, a main body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the gaming machine and the substrate case 16 is provided. You may have. At this time, it is necessary to destroy the caulking portion of the main body when removing the substrate case 16 from the gaming machine. Also in this case, as in the caulking portion 16a, the position where the main body caulking portion is provided is the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged or broken by mistake when the main body caulking portion is broken. When the position is the position (for example, the upper end portion of the substrate case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is the second position away from the first position (for example, the lower portion, the right side with respect to the central portion of the main control substrate 50) It is desirable to provide it on the left or right side.

As described above, by disposing the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and / or the main body caulking portion is provided, the management information display LED 74 can be effectively prevented from being damaged. it can.
In addition, although the position of the caulking portion 16a is the right end portion, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it can be designed as an upper end portion. At this time, the management information display LED 74 is a lower part, a right part, or a left part with respect to the central part of the main control board 50, so that the management information display LED 74 is accidentally damaged when the caulking part 16a is broken. Or being damaged.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) Although the upper limit value of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 times, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games such as 100 times of games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions, such as 1500 games or 3000 cards, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when either one is satisfied.

(2) The advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the storage number display LED 76, but is not limited to this, and a dedicated indicator (LED or the like) for displaying whether or not the advantageous section is present may be provided. However, if the existing LED can cover the cost as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub-control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. For this reason, the lamp that displays the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 that is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that appears to be a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp that displays an advantageous section as long as it is controlled by the main control board 50.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by the segment DP of the digit 2 in the storage number display LED 76, but may be constituted by the segment DP of the digit 4 in the acquisition number display LED 78, for example.

  Furthermore, when the player finishes the game, the menu button 25 may be operated to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, if an advantageous section display LED is arranged in the vicinity of the menu button 25, the player can be made aware that the advantageous section is in effect at the end of the game. For example, even if the storage number display LED 76 (digit 2 segment DP is set as the advantageous section display LED 77) or the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 4 segment DP is set as the advantageous section display LED 77) is arranged near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide an advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the menu button 25 is turned on by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 before the menu button 25 becomes operable, so that the player does not notice the transition to the advantageous section. Can be prevented (displaying a game history (two-dimensional code)).

  (3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, when the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns the power on / off. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again. Therefore, for example, when the store closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit in the hall, or when it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value). Can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (advantageous section data) of the storage number display LED 76 is also initialized. Therefore, in the segment data of the digit 2, the eighth bit is also “0”. "

  (4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in a game selected as a condition device capable of operating the instruction function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game won by a conditional device capable of operating the instruction function during the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, determine the number of games of the instruction function operation game by lottery, etc., execute the instruction function operation game for the determined number of games Also good. And even if the number of games is over, if the continuation conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to continue to stay in the advantageous section and again determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game by lottery etc. It is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, based on the fact that the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is won for each game or a specific condition device (for example, a single winning combination for the small role D or small role E1). To decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number is stored by multiplying the number of games by 100. Similarly, a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by 100 is stored as the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous action and the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of action. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games and the number of payouts can be stored without multiplying by 100 depending on the calculation method (the CPU to be used) of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio. It is not necessarily limited to storing the value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games is stored as the number of games itself, but is not limited to this, and depending on the calculation convenience, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined value (total game number) (Times corresponding value) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are calculated, the data of the storage area in which the number of games itself and the number of payouts itself are stored are multiplied by 100, and the above subtraction process is repeatedly executed. It is possible to calculate by executing the process (for example, FIG. 37).

  (6) The advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory operation ratio, and accessory operation ratio are calculated for each game or every predetermined number of games regardless of whether management information is displayed, and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, respectively. It may be left. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory operation ratio, and accessory operation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when a display request is made), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 and the calculation is performed. Results may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, the management information is displayed in order each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13 and may be another switch such as the bet switch 40 or a switch dedicated to display management information.
In the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are configured as a single switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the setting change / reset switch operation does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by the setting change / reset switch operation. When the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same applies to the case where the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode, and the mode is shifted to the management information display mode on condition that no error has occurred.
For example, when a medal retention error has occurred in the medal selector among the recoverable errors, the management information display mode is not changed unless the error is removed.

  In the above embodiment, management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even after the setting switch 13 is turned on, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is being pressed, and the management information display may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, the first management information “U750” is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). 9 is turned off). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information “y645” is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. The same control as described above is possible when a switch other than the setting switch 13 is used as a switch for displaying management information.

As described above, there are various variations on which switch is used to display the management information and how the operation of the switch that displays the management information is related to the display pattern (the displayed time). However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in this embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, as a display pattern of the management information,
a) Display pattern for always displaying management information b) Pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) The front door is opened and a predetermined switch D) A pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened, a setting key is inserted, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and a predetermined switch is operated. It is done.
However, when an operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the management information is not displayed and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the count may be ended even if the upper limit of the storage capacity has not been reached.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The same applies to the total payout number.

  (9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is “70” (%) or less. For this reason, it is not assumed that the ratio of advantageous sections exceeds “70” (%) in the market. However, the possibility that the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%) cannot be denied when, for example, a goto action is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of “F008” storing the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds “70 (D)”, some warning is output or the advantageous section ratio is displayed. It can be different from the normal time (indicating that it is abnormal). For example, there is a method in which the upper digit “U” and the lower digit “7” are alternately flashed at high speed in the display of the information type “U7” of the advantageous section ratio.

Similarly, when the upper limit of the design value is set to, for example, “60 (%)” with respect to the continuous feature ratio or the accessory ratio, if the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the design value, Examples include outputting a warning and displaying the information type display in the same manner as described above.
Alternatively, the information on the advantageous section ratio or the like is transmitted to the hall computer 200 using the external signal transmitting means 70, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%), information related to the warning may be transmitted. Can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, the advantageous section ratio can be set relatively freely as long as it is set to be “70” (%) or less with respect to all game sections.
In addition, winning from the normal section to the advantageous section may be set to less than “1/32”.
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated whenever a condition device capable of operating the instruction function is selected. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery for whether to activate the function is won. Alternatively, whether to change to the advantageous section where the instruction function is always activated when shifting to the advantageous section, or whether the instruction function is activated only when the lottery of whether to operate the instruction function is won or not. It may be determined by lottery or the like.

  Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be performed when the predetermined number of games is consumed at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or without determining the number of games. Each game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a transition (falling) lottery from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed, and when this lottery is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, the advantageous section is unconditionally controlled so as to shift to the normal section.

  (11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. For example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type “U7” is displayed, the numerical value “50” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the predetermined time is displayed. “U7” and “50” may be alternately and repeatedly displayed every time elapses.

(12) Since the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are calculated by rounding off the decimal part, accurate values are not necessarily displayed. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous feature ratio, and the accessory ratio correspond to the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous feature ratio, and the feature ratio (corresponding respectively). ).
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous feature ratio, and accessory ratio are not limited to the numbers rounded down to the nearest decimal place, but are rounded to the nearest decimal place, rounded up to the next decimal place, and the last digit is “5” or “ It may be a numerical value converted in increments of 10 ”.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that stop on the active line is the same when the small combination E1 is won and when the small combination E2 is won. For example, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle first stop, it becomes possible to stop the middle cherry (winning of the small role 36), and at the first right stop, the middle cherry will not appear (Winner of small role 38). Therefore, it is impossible to determine whether the small role E1 or E2 is won regardless of the appearance of the middle cherry.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle cherries are not allowed to appear, the stop appearance may be changed instead.
For example, when winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry appears, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small role E1 or E2 is won. I can't do it.

  On the other hand, when the small role E1 or E2 is won, when the right first stop is performed, the middle cherries are controlled not to appear in the same manner as described above, and instead of not causing the middle cherries to appear, the small roles E1 or E2 An example is a stop appearance that allows the player to determine which is won.

Specifically, for example, the following control can be given.
First, the small roles included in the winning of the small role E1 are the small roles 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small roles included in the winning of the small role E2 are small roles 36 and 41 (the small role 41 is newly added).
When the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the small combination 36 (middle cherries) can be stopped when the small combination E1 or E2 is first stopped, and the small combination 38 is stopped when the small combination E1 is won. On the other hand, the small combination 41 is stopped at the time of the first right stop when the small combination E2 is won.

  The combination of symbols of the small role 41 is, for example, “Bell A / Bell B” − “Replay” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank”. As a result, the design of the middle reel 31 is different when the small combination 38 is stopped and when the small combination 41 is stopped. “Replay” does not stop at the middle reel 31 when the small role 38 stops, but “replay” always stops at the middle reel 31 when the small role 41 stops. As a result, the winning of the small combination 38 (small combination E1) or the small combination 41 (small combination E2) can be determined.

  Furthermore, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small role 38 is stopped when the middle cherries are not stopped when winning the small role E1, and the small role 41 is stopped when the middle cherries are not stopped when winning the small role E2. May be. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small combination E1 or the small combination E2 is won when the middle cherry is not stopped even at the left or middle first stop.

In addition, for example, the following method can be mentioned.
The small roles included in the winning of the small role E1 are the small roles 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Further, the small roles included in the winning of the small role E2 are also defined as the small roles 36 and the small roles 37 and 38, as in the above embodiment. The small role 36 (middle cherries) can be stopped at the left or middle first stop at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, and at the first right stop at the small role E1 at the first time, the small role 38 is changed according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42. The small combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of the first right stop when the small combination E2 is won.
When the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. Thus, the winning combination E1 or E2 may be determined.

  (14) When 1BBA + small role E1 is elected and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the next timing of the next game arrives, no effect (continuous production etc.) indicating whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is output. It is preferable. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so that it is known that the player has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output a continuous effect whether or not 1BBA (special role) is won. In addition, when it is determined that 1BBA + small role E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always lit even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always illustrated in FIG. The timing 2) indicated by 23 is that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small role E1 wins, so that the small role E1 is elected alone, and the advantageous division is entered. Since it is understood that it has been decided to shift, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like that tells whether or not 1BB has been won.

(15) In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a single combination can win a prize when the pressing order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be any number of small combinations that can be awarded when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. Further, the missing rate at the time of winning the small role B group winning is incorrect 75% in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this, it can be variously set such as 50%.
Further, even when the push order is incorrect when winning the small role C group, it is possible to set the winning combination to be missed with a certain probability as in the case of winning the small role B group.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is increased with respect to setting 1, for example, when the number of games during operation of 1BBA reaches a predetermined number of times. Added an extra section.
However, contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a higher chance of winning for small role A in setting 6 and lowering the winning probability for small role E2 than setting 1. You may make it become the frequency | count (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1 BBA is finished with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an advantageous section is added.

  (17) In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the conditional device that does not include the special combination that can carry over the winning, for example, the small combination E1 is elected alone, to shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous by the predetermined timing. The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the “predetermined timing” is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and various settings can be made. For example, in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, there are a case where the winning determination is finished, a case where the medal payout is finished in the game, a case where the medal payout is finished, and the like.

  In addition, although it does not occur in this embodiment, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which a replay is won, the automatic bet is ended based on the winning of the replay, or the next game (re-game) is started. For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

(18) When “1BBA + small role E1” is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the small role 36 can be won, and the middle cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small role E1, only the middle cherries can appear. When the 1BBA winning flag is also set, the middle cherries do not appear in any pressing order (all win the small role 38). The stop control may be performed as described above.
When such control is performed, there is a demerit that even when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when “1BBA + small role E1” is won, it is not possible to display the middle cherries and beat the player.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is elected alone after entering the inside of 1BBA, the standing winning flag is “1BBA + small winning combination E1”, so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to decide to move to the advantageous section inside, even if the player knows that he is inside, he will win the small role E1 and the middle cherry will appear. , I have the impression that I was wasted. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherries do not appear at all in the interior, so that it is not necessary to give the player the impression that the player has been wasted.

In particular, there are “Bell A / Bell B” − “Cherry” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank” (FIG. 11) as a combination of symbols of the small role 38. The symbol 02 “Bell A / Bell B” − “Cherry” − “Bell A / Bell B” is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above-mentioned symbols of the small role 38 to appear, it is possible to make it appear to be overlooked when the small role B group is won (not shown as a rare role).
The above is the same when “1BBA + small role E2” is elected, when 1BBB is in the interior, after the small role E1 is elected alone, or after being in the 1BBB, after the minor role E2 is elected alone It is.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 17, non-RT and RT1 have the same replay winning probability (the number is “8978”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of non-RT replay.

  (20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the process shifts to RT1, the replay E lottery is performed at RT1, and the advantageous section is added by the winning of the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the transition is made to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to add the advantageous section and set it as a specialized zone (a state where the frequency of the addition is high and the number of games added is high). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed and the specialization zone is continued until the transition to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to winning Replay E), an additional advantageous section is executed. Also good.

  (21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the end of the 1BBA operation is set to non-RT, and the RT after the end of the 1BBB operation is set to RT1. However, instead of shifting to different RTs in this way, the same RT may be transferred. For example, you may make it transfer to non-RT after completion | finish of 1BBB operation | movement. In this case, after the end of the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section, it is possible to add the advantageous section and set it as a specialized zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative), and the bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative) are displayed. Management information such as a payout rate can be calculated and displayed.
As a method for calculating the payout rate, for example, the following method can be cited.
a) “Total number of payouts × 100” ÷ “Total number of games excluding replay after replay winning”
b) “(total number of payouts + replay winning times × 3) × 100” ÷ “total number of games”
When a) is adopted, each buffer for storing “total payout number × 100” and “total number of games excluding replay after replay winning” is provided. When b) is adopted, a buffer for storing “(total payout number + replay winning times × 3) × 100” is provided. Note that a buffer of “total payout number × 100” and “number of replay winning times × 300” may be provided separately, and the values of both may be added.

Note that “3” of “replay winning times × 3” means the betting number of the game when the replay wins. For example, in the case where the number of bets varies depending on the gaming state or the like, it is not limited to “3”, but the value bet on the game when the replay is won (for example, “2” or “1”). There may be games to play.
In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, the number of replay winnings itself (“the number of replay winning times × the value bet on the game when the replay wins” may be provided), and a payout rate is provided. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 and then calculated.

Further, as the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted in the same manner as the calculation method described above.
If the payout rate is displayed as one piece of management information and compared with the payout rate in design, it is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is unauthorized. Furthermore, even in this case, if the lighting mode is changed depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more or 175000 games or more, whether or not it is an unauthorized gaming machine more accurately. It becomes possible to judge whether.
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, the digit 6 is displayed as “P.” and the digits 7 to 9 are displayed. Is used to display the payout rate (a three-digit numerical value).

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following advantages.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes the upper limit value, for example, when the count value is "1500" when the counter is an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and various parameters relating to the advantageous section (stored in the RWM 53) ) Is initialized. The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of games in the instruction function operation game (when the instruction function is activated in the small role B group winning), and the like. Then, “0” is optimal as a value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 that stores parameters to be initialized are continuous. Specifically, for example, “F100”, “F101”, “F102”,.

Similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 when the setting is changed, the process of adding “0” to the address of the RWM 53 within a predetermined range can be initialized by repeating the process while shifting the address one by one. This is because the process can be executed with a simplified process. Note that the parameters that are cleared when the advantageous interval is the upper limit value are also initialized when the setting is changed.
Note that the address of the RWM 53 that stores the parameters to be initialized is assigned with regularity (for example, “F100”, “F102”, “F104”,...), And “0” is assigned to the address. Even when the initialization process is performed by repeatedly performing the process of entering by shifting the address by a predetermined value (“2” in the above case), the process can be performed with a simplified process.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, if the count value is “0”, it is “0” because of the initialization, or the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) And “0” is not known from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous interval is based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not the advantageous interval is present (in a predetermined area of the RWM 53). It is necessary to do this based on
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is “1500”, it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the upper limit is based only on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the RWM 53 data shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processes of FIGS. 32, 36 and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically after the winning determination process. .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is continuously displayed. For example, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times in one game. .
It is also conceivable to calculate the advantageous section ratio and the like each time it is displayed.
As described above, the same management information (for example, advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times during one game.
(25) The above embodiment and various modified examples are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

Subsequently, the third and subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of terms are as follows.
The “instructed game section” refers to a game section in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch or an execution frequency is increased in an advantageous section.
The “instructed game section” is similar to a conventional AT (abbreviation of “assist time”. “ART” when executing AT in RT having a high replay winning probability). In the following description, “instruction game section” is referred to as “AT” as necessary.

“Always execute the instruction function operation game” means a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, when the replay group B is won, the replay group B is won, and the small role group B is won. , And when the small role C group is won, the instruction function must be activated.
Note that the AT of this embodiment is executed in principle at RT3 (high replay probability), so it is “ART” in principle. However, the AT may fall to RT2 due to a player's operation error of the stop switch. Even if it falls from RT3 to RT2, AT is continued. Furthermore, AT may be executed even in RTs other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, the AT in the RT that does not have a high replay probability like the RT3 is not strictly “ART”. In addition, when it falls from RT3 to RT2 during the AT, in order to return to RT3 by operating the instruction function at the time of replay B group winning, the correct pressing order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

On the other hand, “higher execution frequency” means, for example, that the instruction function is not activated at “100%” when the small role B group is won or the small role C group is won, for example, the instruction function is activated at 95%. It is a concept that includes such cases.
As will be described later, in the designated game period, when the small role B group is won, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to activate the instruction function, and when the lottery is won, the instruction function may be activated. In such a case, it is defined that “the execution frequency is increased” because “the instruction function is not always activated”.

As described above, the instruction game section is a game section in which the instruction function operation game is executed. Therefore, the designated game section is always an advantageous section, and the designated game section is a normal section or a standby section (hereinafter, the normal section and the standby section may be collectively referred to as “non-advantage section”). There is no.
In addition, the start and end of the designated game section can be arbitrarily set. For example, the instruction game section may be started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is started, the instruction game section is not started immediately, but the instruction game section is started when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the end condition of the instruction game section may be determined at the start of the instruction game section, or the end condition may not be determined at the start of the instruction game section.
When the end condition of the instruction game section is determined by the start of the instruction game section, the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) can be used to determine the designated game section. For example, firstly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the designated game section, the number of games in the designated game section may be set to “50” games or “100” games, for example.

  Secondly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of payouts. If set in this way, the end condition is the same as that of the special game. Specifically, for example, the end condition of the designated game section may be set to “the number of payouts exceeds 300”.

Thirdly, it is possible to set the end condition of the designated game section with a difference number. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section may be set to “the difference number has exceeded 200”.
Fourthly, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of times the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group and the small role C group (only the small role B group may be selected). Specifically, in the game in which the end condition of the instruction game section is set to “the instruction function operation count is 50 times when winning the small role B group and the small role C group winning”, and the instruction function operation frequency is 50 times. For example, the instruction game section is ended.

In order to extend the instruction game section in the instruction game section determined as described above, the parameters defining the instruction game section are changed (also referred to as “extension”, “addition”, or “addition”).
For example, in the instruction game section of 100 games, when the instruction game section is extended to the 50th game and the number of games is added 30 times, the remaining number of games in the instruction game section is changed from 50 games to 80 games. Be changed.
Similarly to the above, when the instruction game section is set by the payout number, the difference number, or the instruction function operation number, when extending the instruction game section, the value to be added to these parameters is determined and the remaining parameters are determined. Add (add) the values obtained.

In addition, based on the transition of the gaming state, the designated gaming section (AT) may be started and ended.
Here, the “game state” may include a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the above-described RT (lottery state). That is, the gaming state is a concept including both a lottery state and a control state.
Further, the “control state” is a game state that can be determined regardless of the RT (as described later, there may be a control state linked to the RT).
Examples of the control state include concepts such as a precursor, CZ (abbreviation of “chance zone”), AT, and normal. More specifically, as a control state performed in the advantageous section, a state with a high transition probability (high probability state) or a low state (low probability state) to the instruction game section (AT), or an instruction game section (AT) Examples of the control state include various control states in consideration of game characteristics, such as a state where the winning probability of adding the designated game section (AT) is high (such as a special zone for addition) and a low state.
And the control state of a normal area is normal, and the control state of an advantageous area is a precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, simultaneously with the transition to the advantageous section, the control state is changed from “normal” to “precursor”. In this precursor, there are a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of transition (fall) to normal. When the condition for transition to CZ is satisfied in the precursor, the process proceeds to CZ, and when the condition for transition to normal is satisfied, the process proceeds to normal.
Moreover, when it transfers to CZ, it has the case where it transfers to AT (promotion), and the case where it transfers to a precursor or normal (fall). When the condition for transition to AT is satisfied during CZ, the transition is made to AT, and when the condition for transition to precursor or normal is satisfied, it shifts to precursor or normal, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, when the transition to the AT is performed, when the RT transition similar to that in the first embodiment (FIG. 22) is performed, the control is performed so as to stay at RT3. For example, when it is decided to shift to AT in RT2, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed at the time of replay B group winning. Further, after the transition to RT3, in order to prevent falling from RT3, the correct answer pressing order for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function when the replay group C is won.

Further, for example, a finite RT is provided, and AT is used while staying at the finite RT. In this case, the AT ends when the finite RT shifts to another RT.
Note that “finite RT” means that the player stays at the RT until the predetermined number of games is consumed, and when the predetermined number of games is consumed, the RT termination condition is satisfied and the process shifts to another RT.
For example, when transitioning to a finite RT after the end of a special game, an AT may be executed with this finite RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is digested with the finite RT, the process shifts to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and ends the AT, that is, the designated game section and the advantageous section.
In addition, as in the first embodiment, when a special combination is won, a transition is made to RT4 (internal RT). For example, when a special combination in a finite RT is won, RT transfer may be performed. In this case, the limited RT is ended by winning the special role, and after the special game is ended, it can be started from a predetermined RT (for example, non-RT in FIG. 59) different from the limited RT.
On the other hand, in the case of a specification that does not shift to RT due to the special role elected, even if the special role is elected during the finite RT, the finite RT is not terminated, and after the special game was finished, it was being executed until then. It can be resumed from the middle of the finite RT.

  Moreover, since the precursor and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be activated. Accordingly, whether or not to activate the instruction function is arbitrary, but since it is during AT that the instruction function is operated constantly or frequently, the instruction function is not activated during the precursor or CZ as during AT. During the warning or CZ, there are cases where the instruction function is activated at a small rate or the instruction function is activated only once. It should be noted that, in the specification in which the transition from the normal section to the prelude is made in accordance with the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the normal section may fall to the normal (normal section) before the transition to the CZ or AT, the prelude or CZ (advantageous) It is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once during (section).

In particular, when shifting to the advantageous section, in order to quickly achieve “to execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section”, the instruction function is activated at the time of the first small role B group winning. .
Since AT is premised on an advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends, AT also ends. Therefore, for example, when the number of games remaining in the AT is reached, when the 1500 games that are the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated.

“Freeze” refers to delaying the progress of a game by pausing for a predetermined period of time. For example, receiving a medal, receiving an operation of the bet switch 40, receiving an operation of the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42. The function related to (acceptance of the stop operation of the reel 31) is to temporarily stop. It is possible to execute such a freeze and output various effects during the freeze period.
Freezing is executed at the end of AT, for example. On the other hand, if only CZ is executed after the transition to the advantageous section (when AT is not executed), freeze is not executed. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, there is a case where the freeze is performed and a case where it is not performed at the end of the advantageous section.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is characterized in that the number of AT games can be increased.
As described above, there are various AT parameters. In the third embodiment, the AT end condition is determined by the number of games.
In the third embodiment, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) will be described as processing on the main control board 50 side.
Further, Example 1 (FIG. 53) and Example 2 (FIG. 54) will be described as processing on the sub-control board 80 side.
In the following example, AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of AT. That is, “AT = advantageous section”.
However, as in the first embodiment described above, the fourth embodiment described later, etc., of course, there are cases where it is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (for example, a precursor, CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc.). (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following Examples 1 to 10, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous section counter, and the like are provided (in all examples, these three counters are not always provided).
In the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes. The description of step numbers that are the same as those already described will be omitted as appropriate.
The count value by the counter is abbreviated as “counter value”.
Furthermore, “clearing” the counter value means initializing the counter value (setting the counter value to “0” in the increment counter).

In the third embodiment, during the AT, when the condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment is won, the AT game count is added. The number of games to be added may be determined in advance according to the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when winning the condition device to be added.
For example, in FIG. 17, when winning the small role E1 with the number “250”, the number of extra games is determined as “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). To do. In addition, when winning the small role E1 with the number “750”, the number of extra games is determined to be “30” (50%), “50” (30%), or “100” (20%). It is done.
Regardless of the above example, it is possible to predetermine the number of AT extra games based on the control state and the condition device, or to draw the AT extra game times based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, for example, even when the same condition device is won, the number of extra games determined or drawn by the control state being executed can be varied.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” as described above, and as in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500 games. Therefore, the AT is 1500 games at the longest.
Here, when starting the AT, an initial value of the number of games of the AT is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) number of games of the AT is added according to the selected condition device.
Regardless of whether the total number of AT games (the sum of the number of AT digestion games and the number of remaining games; the same shall apply hereinafter) exceeds “1500” in the case of adding the number of AT games. There are a case where the addition is executed and a case where the addition exceeding “1500” is not executed.
As a result of adding the number of AT games, even if the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, the number of AT games to be executed is limited to “1500”.

Furthermore, when adding the number of games during AT, the method of executing the addition under the same conditions from the beginning to the end, and as the upper limit of 1500 games is approached, it becomes difficult to add (the expected value of the number of additions decreases) ) Method. As an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of games of the AT is “100”, for example, and no additional is performed at all, when the condition device to be added first is won, for example, 80 An additional number “100” is selected with a probability of%, but when the total number of AT games is “1000” or more, when the same condition device as above is won, for example, an additional 80% probability is added. This is the case where the number “50” is selected.
In addition, when controlling in this way, there are a case where the addition is continued even when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” and a case where the addition is stopped.
Furthermore, in the case where the addition is continued even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, even if the value exceeds “1500”, the value is stored, and the amount exceeding “1500” Is a method of clearing the value.

FIG. 43 (Example 1) below is an example in which, even if the total number of AT games exceeds “1500” (regardless of the total number of games), the addition is performed without any limitation (added to the counter).
FIG. 44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4) are examples in which, when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, no extra is executed (not added to the counter). In this case, when the extra lottery itself is not executed and when the extra lottery is executed, it is determined whether or not the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” after the extra lottery. The case of clearing the extra lottery result. The latter is adopted in FIG. 44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4).

In addition, when it is decided to add, a freeze may be generated. This is to generate a freeze and output an extra effect (such as the number of games to be added) during that time.
However, if it is decided that the number of games will be added and the freeze is generated, and the total number of games of AT exceeds “1500”, the added number will be cleared. It will happen that it will not be done.
For this reason, for example, after winning the condition device to be added in the current game and performing the extra lottery, it is decided to add, and after confirming that the additional number is added to the remaining number of games of the AT, For example, in the next game, there is a control that generates a freeze as well as an extra effect.

  Furthermore, FIG. 47 (Example 5) to FIG. 49 (Example 7) show that when the total number of games of AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when the upper limit “1500” is approached), the expected value of the additional number is reduced. This is an example. Here, when making the expected value of the number of additions small, it is possible to reduce the probability of winning the addition, decrease the number of additions, and execute both of these.

Further, in FIG. 50 (Example 8) to FIG. 52 (Example 10), when the total number of games of the AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when the upper limit “1500” is approached), the winning combination (the winning condition device) This is an example in which a lottery is performed by lowering the grade. Here, “reducing the grade of the winning combination” is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as a condition device to be subjected to the extra lottery, as shown in FIG. 17, a small combination E1 having a set number “250” and a small combination E1 having a set number “750” are provided. It is assumed that
Here, the small combination E1 with the placement number “250” is a condition device that is less likely to win because the placement number is smaller than the small combination E1 with the placement number “750”. In such a case, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role E1 with the number “250” is x1, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small number E1 with the number “750” is x2 ( x2 <x1).
Further, as an example of changing the expected value of the extra number, a method is adopted in which a plurality of types of lottery tables are provided in advance and the lottery table used in the extra lottery is changed.

When the total number of AT games is less than “1000”, when winning the small role E1 with the number “250”, the lottery is performed with the expected value x1 and the small number E1 with the number “750” is won. In some cases, the lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
Next, when the total number of games of AT is “1000” or more, both when winning the small role E1 with the number “250” and when winning the small role E1 with the number “750”, The lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the winning combination E1 with the set number “250” is won, the grade is lowered to the winning combination E1 with the set number “750” and the lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total number of games of the AT is “1000” or more, when winning the small role E1 of the number “250”, the lottery is performed by adding the expected value x2 to the small number E1 of the number “750”. When winning, the lottery may be performed by adding the expected value x3 (x3 <x2).
In addition, although said expectation value x1-x3 assumes the value exceeding "0", it may be "0", for example. The extra lottery for the expected value “0” for the extra number includes, for example, setting the winning probability of the extra to “0”, or winning the extra number “0” even though the winner is won by the extra lottery. .

For example, it is assumed that the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role E1 is x11 and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role D is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total number of games of the AT is less than “1000”, when the small role E1 is won, the lottery is performed with the expected value x11, and when the small role D is won, the additional value is drawn with the expected value x12. .
Next, in the case where the total number of games of the AT is “1000” or more, when winning the small role E1, it is replaced with the winning of the small role D, and the lottery is performed with the expected value x12.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a lower-ranking winning combination in order to lower the winning combination, the winning combination itself is not changed.

  Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total number of games of the AT for which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to “1000”, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to “500”, “800”, “1200”. ”,“ 1300 ”,“ 1400 ”, etc., can be variously set according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a first example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digestion games during the AT and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, “100” is given as an initial value (number of games) at the start of AT. Therefore, “100” is set in the AT counter at the start of AT. Each game is decremented by “1” (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to an initial value “1500” at the start of AT. Each game is decremented by “1” (decrement counter).
As described above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes “0”, the AT end condition is satisfied.
If 1BB is won during AT, the AT counter is not updated until the end of 1BB game (counting is interrupted). On the other hand, the upper limit counter is updated every game even during the 1BB game. In other words, the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, and therefore, after the completion of 1BB, the game restarts from the AT counter value at the time of 1BB winning.
Furthermore, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 in the first embodiment, and is set to “1” during the advantageous section and “0” when it is not the advantageous section. Is set.

  43 (a), in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs a command transmission process at the start of the game on the sub control board 80. This process is a process shown in FIG. In step S402, control when the start switch 41 is operated is executed. In step S402, it is continuously detected whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is executed. This process is the same as the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an extra lottery is performed. Here, “addition” is an addition of the number of games played by the AT. Therefore, when the game is not in AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but non-AT), the extra lottery in step S404 is not executed. The extra lottery in step S404 is a process shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that an AT lottery is executed when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won.
Further, it is assumed that the additional number and the winning probability are determined in a lottery table to be described later.

In step S405, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is a process shown in FIG.
In the next step S406, it is continuously determined whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, variable update processing is performed as processing at the end of the game. This process is the process shown in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

If it progresses to step S401 of Fig.43 (a), the command transmission process at the time of the game start of the same figure (b) will be performed.
First, in step S411, an AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. As the value of the advantageous section flag, “1” is transmitted when it is in the advantageous section, and “0” is transmitted when it is not in the advantageous section. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. Through the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters, that is, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, and an advantageous section flag value, to the sub control board 80.

If it progresses to step S404 of Fig.43 (a), the addition lottery will be performed in the same figure (c).
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. This lottery table is stored in the ROM 54 in advance, and determines the number of extras corresponding to the winning combination and the winning probability. Specifically, for example, when winning the number “250” when winning the small role E1 alone, the probability of determining the additional number as “50” is 60% and the probability of determining the additional number as “40”. Setting to 40% is mentioned. In addition, when winning the number “750” when winning the small role E1 alone, the probability of determining the additional number as “30” is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the additional number as “20” is set to 50%. Can be mentioned. For other condition devices, a winning probability and an additional number are also defined.

  In the next step S422, the lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result (the determined additional number) drawn in step S422 is added to the AT counter value. For example, when the AT counter value so far is “50” (the number of remaining games) and the additional number is determined to be “20”, the AT counter value is updated to “70”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When the process proceeds to step S405 in FIG. 43A, the command transmission at the time of operating the start switch in FIG.
Here, in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. Therefore, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411 at the start of the game, but in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted again. If it is not decided to increase the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is determined to increase the number of AT games, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. In the sub control board 80, when the AT counter value is received again in step S431 after receiving the AT counter value in step S411, the AT counter value stored in the sub control board 80 side is received in step S431. Rewrite to AT counter value.
Before step S431, it is determined whether or not the AT is added in the game, and only when the AT is added and executed, the second AT counter value is transmitted in the game in step S431. Also good.

If it progresses to step S407 of Fig.43 (a), the variable update process of the same figure (e) will be performed.
First, in step S441, “1” is subtracted from the AT counter value. In step S442, the upper limit counter value is decremented by “1”. In the next step S443, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0” (that is, when the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit “1500”), the process proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is “0” and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. Here, when the AT counter value is “0”, it means that the remaining number of games of the AT is “0”.
In order to determine whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more, for example, an instruction function operation counter or an instruction function operation flag may be provided.
An example of the instruction function operation counter is an increment counter that increments by “1” every time the instruction function is operated. If this counter value is “1” or more, the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is increased. It can be determined that it is “1” or more.

  In addition, the instruction function operation flag is turned off when the instruction function operation game has never been executed after executing the advantageous section and AT, and is turned on (afterwards) when the first instruction function operation game is executed. It is a flag. When the instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, when shifting to the advantageous section, at least one instruction function operation game (the winning combination with the largest payout number among the games having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch 42) is selected. In the first embodiment, the advantage section cannot be ended unless the small group B group winning game (the same applies hereinafter) is executed. In this way, executing at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section has priority over the AT end condition.

  However, when reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section without executing the instruction function operation game once, it is possible to end the advantageous section (see the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69) described later). ). Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0” in Step S443. If it is “0”, the advantageous interval and the AT are determined without performing the determination in Step S444. To end.

  If it is determined in step S444 that “the AT counter value is“ 0 ”and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is“ 1 ”or more” ”, the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied. move on. On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S444, the processing according to this flowchart ends (the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section).

  In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to “0”). In step S446, the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to “0”). In step S447, the value of the advantageous section flag is cleared (set to “0”). As described above, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all parameters related to the advantageous section. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of the control process on the main control board 50 side. 44 includes an AT counter (initial value “100”, a decrement counter), an extra counter (initial value “0”, an increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, a decrement counter). . Further, as in Example 1, an advantageous section flag is provided.
The extra counter increments the extra number every time the number of games is added during AT.

44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 in FIG.
Also, in the extra lottery process in FIG. 44 (c), after the extra lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether or not the extra counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to “1400”. That is, “100” is set as the initial value of the AT game count, and when the AT additional game count reaches “1400”, the total AT game count becomes “1500” in total, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. To reach. For this reason, it is set not to add an extra game number “1400”.

When it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C that the additional counter value has exceeded the specified number (“1400”), even if the additional number is determined in the lottery in step S422, the additional number is added. First, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the added counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the lottery result (determined number of additions) in step S422 is added to the addition counter value. The process in the next step S423 is the same as that in Example 1 described above. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before adding lottery = “50”, the adding counter value = “200”, and the determined adding number is “30”, the AT counter value after adding is “80”, adding The counter value is “230”.

Further, in the command transmission process when the start switch is operated in FIG. 4D, the additional counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in step S461. In Example 1, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but in Example 2, the additional counter value is transmitted. The sub-control board 80 can determine that the addition has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the addition counter value reaches “1400”.
Furthermore, in FIG. 4E, steps S441 to S447 are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (example 1). In addition, after step S447, the process proceeds to step S471, where the additional counter value is cleared. This is because at the end of the advantageous section, all parameters relating to the advantageous section are cleared.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a third example of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 3 of FIG. 45, as counters, an AT counter (increment counter which is set to an initial value “0” and increments by “1” every time one AT is played), an extra counter (initial value “100”). , An increment counter) and an upper limit counter (same as in Example 1). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1500” which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.

45, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In FIG. 8C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processing as in the first example. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, where it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number (“1500”). That the added counter value has exceeded the specified number “1500” means that, in Example 3, the total number of games played by the AT has exceeded “1500”. Therefore, when the additional counter value exceeds the specified number “1500”, even if the additional number is determined in step S422, the additional number is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined additional number is added to the additional counter value. Note that step S423 (addition of an additional number to the AT counter value) shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games during the AT.

FIG. 4D is the same processing as FIG. 44 (Example 2).
Furthermore, in FIG. 4E, in step S481, “1” is added to the AT counter value. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. In the next steps S442 and S443, the same processing as in Example 1 is performed. In the next step S482, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of AT games exceeds the number of added games, it is determined that the end condition of the AT and the advantageous section is satisfied.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. When the number of AT games reaches “100” without any additional AT games, the AT counter value becomes “100” and the additional counter value becomes “100”. ≧≧ addition counter value ”is satisfied. If “Yes” is determined in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined as “No”, the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are not satisfied, and thus the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S483, it is determined whether the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. If it is “1” or more, the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “1” or more, the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section, so the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The processes after step S445 are the same as those in FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a fourth example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 4 of FIG. 46, the counter is an additional counter (increment counter set to an initial value “100”), an advantageous interval counter (set to an initial value “0”, and during each AT, during an advantageous interval, (Incrementation counter incremented by “1”).
In Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games is counted by an advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous section counter of Example 4 has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of Example 3.
Further, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 or the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous section counter also serves as the upper limit counter. The specified number is “1500” as in the third example.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
In FIG. 5B, when step S401 is started, an advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, and the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in the same manner as in Example 1 and the like.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 5E, in step S501, “1” is added to the advantageous section counter value. In the next step S502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is “1500” or more. When it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than “1500”, the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, and the process proceeds to step S504 to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is not “1500” or more, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the added counter value. Similarly to step S482 in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value, it means that the AT has no remaining number of games. When it is determined “Yes” in step S503, the process proceeds to step S483. When it is determined “No”, the process according to this flowchart is ended (the next game also continues the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is the same process as in FIG. 45 (example 3). If “Yes” is determined in the step S483, the process proceeds to a step S504, and if “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The next steps S447 and S471 are the same processing as in FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating Example 5 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 5 of FIG. 47, the counter is an AT counter (decrement counter that is set to an initial value “100” and decrements “1” by one during AT), and an additional counter (an initial value “0” is set and added). Increment counter for adding an additional number for each time) and an upper limit counter (set to an initial value “1500” and decremented by “1” for each game during the advantageous period). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1000”.

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Moreover, in the same figure (c), two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery of the additional number. Note that the lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, ultra-high accuracy, high accuracy, normal, low accuracy, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games will be added is set to a normal probability or a high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games will be added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery table A may have an expected value of the additional number set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Further, by combining the two, the lottery table A has a high extra probability and the expected value of the extra number is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low extra winner probability and the expected value of the extra number It may be set to small.

  In FIG. 5C, first, in step S511, a lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number (“1000”). When it is determined that the additional counter value is not equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this process, when the number of additions is less than “1000”, the lottery table A is used for the addition lottery, and when the number of additions is “1000” or more, the lottery table B is used for the addition lottery. Therefore, the ease of addition is changed with the addition number “1000” as a threshold value.
The processes after step S422 are the same as those in FIG. 44 (example) 2. Also, FIGS. 4D and 4E are the same processing as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a sixth example of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 6 of FIG. 48, the counter is set to an AT counter (initial value “0”, increment counter that increments by “1” during AT), and an additional counter (initial value “100”). Increment counter for adding an additional number for each time) and an upper limit counter (set to an initial value “1500” and decremented by “1” for each game during the advantageous period). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).

When Example 6 in FIG. 48 is compared with Example 5 in FIG. 47, the following points are different.
Similarly to FIG. 45 (example 3), the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value “0”, and therefore, when the extra lottery is performed, the extra number is not added to the AT counter.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In FIG. 48C, after the lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, where the number of additions is added to the additional counter value, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated (in step S423 in FIG. 47 (example 5)). No processing).
FIG. 4D is the same processing as FIG. 47 (Example 5). Furthermore, FIG. 5E is the same processing as FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a seventh example of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter as in FIG. 46 (Example 4), and is an additional counter (initial value “100” is incremented to add the additional number each time it is added). Counter), and an upper limit counter (set to an initial value “0” and incremented every game, “1” during the advantageous period). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also serves as an AT counter (counter that counts the number of AT games).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). FIG. 8C is the same processing as FIG. 48 (Example 6).
Furthermore, in FIG. 5E, in step S521, “1” is added to the upper limit counter value. In step S522, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is “1500” or more. When it is determined that the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than “1500”, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S446 in order to terminate the advantageous section and AT.

  On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S522, the process proceeds to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. While the upper limit counter is a counter that increments each game “1” during the advantageous period, the additional counter is a counter that increments the additional number as an initial value “100”. When “≧ additional counter value”, it means that the AT has no remaining number of games. When it is determined “Yes” in step S523, the process proceeds to step S483. When it is determined “No”, the next game is also continued in AT, so the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S483, as described above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operation game has been executed one or more times. If it has been executed, the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S483, the next game is continued in AT, so the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The processes in steps S446, S447, and S471 are the same as those in FIG. 47 (example 3). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an eighth example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as in FIG. 44 (Example 2). Further, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery in step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and a conditional device group setting process is performed. The other processes in (a) are the same as those in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
FIG. 4B is the same processing as FIG. 44 (example 2).

FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the condition device group setting process in step S531.
First, in step S541, “0” is set as the conditional device group number.
Here, the “condition device group number” is a number assigned to each group by dividing the condition devices to be added up into a plurality of groups among a plurality of condition devices lottered in the internal lottery.

In this example, two condition device group numbers “0” and “1” are illustrated. Each condition device group number has a lottery table for extra lottery.
Further, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “0” is referred to as a lottery table A, and a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “1” is referred to as a lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the additional number is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role E1 is set to “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role D is set to “x2”. Suppose that Then, it is assumed that “x1> x2” (the expected value of the additional number is higher when winning the small role E1 than when winning the small role D).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination D is “1”, and the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination E1 is “0”.

Therefore, when the small combination D is won, the lottery table B is set because the condition device group number is “1”. On the other hand, when the small combination E1 is won, the lottery table A is set because the condition device group number is “0”.
Then, the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A is “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B is “x2”. .

The description returns to FIG.
When the condition device group number “0” is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number (“1000”). If it is determined that the number is not the specified number or more, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543, and the condition device group number “1” is set. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  Therefore, in the above example, when the small combination D is won, the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination D is originally “1”, so it remains “1”. On the other hand, when the small role E1 is elected, the condition device group number “0” is set in principle. However, when the additional counter value is “1000” or more, the condition device group number “1” is reset. Set.

In the addition lottery in FIG. 4D, first, in step S551, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value “x1”) is set when the condition device group number is “0”, and the lottery table B (expected value “x2”) is set when the condition device group number is “1”. The The subsequent processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example 2).
50, (e) and (f) are the same processes as (d) and (e) in FIG. 44 (Example 2), respectively.

  In the above example, two types of condition device group numbers, “0” and “1”, are given, but three or more types may be provided. For example, if the expected value of the additional number is “x1> x2> x3”, if the additional counter value is less than “1000”, the lottery table of the expected value “x1” is used, and the additional counter value is “1000” or more and less than “1200” Then, the lottery table with the expected value “x2” is used, and when the additional counter value is “1200” or more, the lottery table with the expected value “x3” is used.

  As described above, in FIG. 50 (example 8), when winning the small combination E1, the additional lottery is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small combination E1, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more. Will be added and the lottery will be performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small role D. That is, when the number of added games increases and approaches the upper limit “1500” of the advantageous section, the winning combination grade is lowered and the lottery is performed.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a ninth example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 of FIG. 51, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as in FIG. 45 (Example 3). Also, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In FIG. 51, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as those of (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 45 (example 3), respectively. It is processing.
In FIG. 51, the process of (c) is the same process as (c) of FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 51, the process of (d) is different from (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8) in that step S423 is not provided. The other processes are the same as those in (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example 10 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 10 of FIG. 52, the counter includes an addition counter and an upper limit counter similar to FIG. 49 (Example 7) (no AT counter). Also, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 49 (example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as those of (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 49 (Example 7), respectively. It is processing.
In FIG. 52, the process of (c) is the same process as (c) of FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 52, the process of (d) is the same as that of FIG. 51 (example 9).

As described above, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) have been described. Basically, an AT counter that counts the number of AT games, an extra counter that counts the number of AT games, An upper limit counter (advantageous section counter) for counting the upper limit “1500” of the section is provided.
These counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter need not be provided as shown in FIG. 46 (Example 4) or FIG. 49 (Example 7). In this case, the number of AT games is substantially counted by another counter.
Further, in Examples 1 to 10, the lottery is performed in accordance with the selected condition device. Here, when a condition device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

When the extra lottery is performed, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), the extra number may be determined regardless of the extra number up to now.
On the other hand, when the extra lottery is performed, the extra number may be determined in consideration of the extra number up to the present time as shown in FIG. 47 (example 5) and FIG. 50 (example 8).
“Considering the number of additions” means that the larger the number of additions, the smaller the number of additions (the expected value of the addition number becomes smaller) in the subsequent addition lottery. As a result, the rate of increase of the additional number accompanying the progress of the game can be moderated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), it is also possible to execute an unlimited addition. If unlimited additions are executed without limit, for example, the number of remaining AT games may be “2000”, “3000”, or the like. However, even if such a number of games is reached, priority is given to the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section (step S443 in FIG. 43 (e)), and the AT ends at that time.

However, in the case where an unlimited number of AT games is executed as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), if the number of extra games is reported to the player as it is, an increase exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section will be made. The number may be reported. In this case, the player may misunderstand that he can play a game exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500”.
Accordingly, the sub-control board 80 performs various controls as described below regarding the notification of the number of AT games and the number of additional games corresponding to the above points.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of the control process related to the advantageous section and AT on the sub-control board 80 side and addition.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, taking FIG. 43 (example 1) as an example, processing for receiving commands transmitted in steps S411 to S413 in FIG. 43B and step S431 in FIG.
In Examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted. In the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

  In FIG. 53A, in step S601, processing for receiving an AT counter value is executed. This process is a process for receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, processing for receiving the additional number ((b) in the figure) is executed. In the next step S603, an advantageous section flag reception process is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value (“0” or “1”) of the advantageous section flag and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 as in step S601. Further, in the next step S604, a process ((d) in the figure) for receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

In step S602, the process (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S611, the received additional number is added to the additional counter. This extra counter is provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Next, proceeding to step S612, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to “1500”. Accordingly, in this example, as in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the additional counter value exceeds “1500”, it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. When it is determined in step S612 that the added counter value exceeds the specified number (“1500”), the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, “1” is set to the additional effect suppression flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the “additional effect suppression flag” is used to output no additional effect when the additional number is already “1500” and to output the additional effect when the additional number is “1500” or less. This is a flag for making the determination.
In step S614, the additional number in the game is stored (in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In step S604, the process (c) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not the game has an additional number. This determination is made by determining whether or not the number of additions stored in step S614 is “0”. If it is determined that the additional number is included, the process proceeds to step S622. If it is determined that the additional number is not included, the process proceeds to step S625.
In step S622, it is determined whether or not the additional effect suppression flag is “1”. When it is determined that it is “1”, the process proceeds to step S623, and when it is determined that it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S624.

  In step S623, an effect without an extra effect is selected. That is, since the added number has reached the specified number (“1500”), and even if the added lottery is won in the game, it is impossible to add more than the present, so control is performed so as not to output the added effect. The effect selected here is a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, an effect that suggests a replay win (such as blue) when replay wins). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S622 and the process proceeds to step S624, it is possible to select an effect with an added effect. For example, the effect which alert | reports all or one part of the addition number in the said game is mentioned. In addition, it is not always necessary to select an effect with an extra effect in the game for which the number of extras has been determined. For example, by switching to a continuous effect, and then selecting an effect with an additional effect for digesting several games. Also good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that there is no additional number in the game and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As described above, the normal effect includes outputting an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of the control process related to the advantageous section and AT on the sub-control board 80 side and addition.
In Example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving a payout suppression flag is executed. Here, the ball-out suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-control board 80, and when it is “1”, it means that the extra effect is suppressed. When it is “0”, it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. In other words, when the outgoing ball suppression flag “1” is transmitted from the main control board 50, it is a command to suppress the extra effect.
In the example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 53B, on the sub control board 80 side, an additional effect suppression flag is set. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, it is determined by the main control board 60 whether to suppress the extra effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as an out-ball suppression flag.

Examples of a method for the main control board 50 to transmit the output ball suppression flag include the following methods.
Taking FIG. 44 (example 2) as an example, when it is determined “Yes” in step S451 in FIG. 44 (c), the output control flag provided on the main control board 50 is turned on. Then, in FIG. 44D, after the step S461, the outgoing ball suppression flag is transmitted.

54 is the same as Example 1 of FIG. 53 except Step S631 and Step S632.
In step S631, the process (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S641, when a play-out suppression flag is received, it is determined whether or not the value is “1”. When it is determined that it is “1”, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S642, “1” is set to the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the processing proceeds to step S643, “0” is set to the additional effect suppression flag, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Accordingly, when the received ball suppression flag is “1”, the additional effect suppression flag on the sub-control board 80 side is set to “1”, and when the received ball suppression flag is “0”, the additional effect suppression flag is set. Is set to “0”. Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54 (c), as in FIG. 53 (example 1), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the additional counter value exceeds the specified number. Therefore, in step S611, the additional number is added to the additional counter, and the next step In step S614, the added number is stored.
In addition, the effect group number reception process in (d) in the figure is the same process as in FIG. 53 (Example 1).

  In the case where the sub control board 80 outputs an extra effect, for example, when the extra number determined in the game is “200”, all the extra numbers (“200”) may be reported in the effect of the game. However, it is also possible to notify in small increments (individual numbers are divided and notified) in a plurality of games (for example, continuous effects) including the game. Specifically, when the additional number is “200” in the game, the additional number “100” is notified in the game, “50” is notified in the next game, and “50” is displayed in the next game. For example.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an image display example of the image display device 23 by the sub-control board 80 regarding addition in AT, and is a diagram illustrating Examples 1 to 4. FIG.
First, in the first example, the image display device 23 before the addition includes “digestion G (meaning“ number of AT digestion games ”) 1200”, “remaining G (meaning“ number of AT remaining games ”) 300. "Is displayed. Therefore, since “AT digestion game count + remaining game count = 1500”, the number of executable AT games has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are added internally (for example, the case like step S423 in FIG. 43 (c)), the display of the added number is changed and an effect related to the addition is performed. Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition remains the display before the addition.

Of course, “500” may be added to the counter (AT counter, extra counter, etc.) provided on the sub-control board 80 side when adding 500 games. For the number of AT games and the number of additions, real values may be managed by a counter, and only display may be performed as in Example 1. In the case of such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub control board 80 side.
Alternatively, even if 500 games are added, the counter may not be updated.
If the image display is controlled as in Example 1, it is possible to suppress an effect related to unnecessary addition.

  In Example 2, when the number of AT digestion games is 1200 games and the remaining number of games is 200 games, when 500 games are added internally, the correct value (the remaining number of games after the addition) This is an example of switching to another display without displaying. In Example 2, the number of remaining games may be displayed as “celebration” or “congratulations”. In addition, a display such as “?” Can be cited.

  In Example 2, when the total number of AT digest games and the remaining number of games is “1500” or less, the remaining number of games is displayed. However, by further adding, the total number of AT games is “ If “1500” is exceeded, the remaining number of games is not displayed so that the player can grasp it. Since the display of the number of remaining games of the AT has changed from a specific numerical value to a display other than the numerical value, the player can grasp that the addition has been performed. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the number of remaining games of the AT, the player cannot grasp the number of remaining games of the AT.

In addition, in the case where the number of digestion games of AT is “1200” and the remaining number of games is “200” before the addition, when “500” is added, the remaining number of games of AT may be set to “700” on the counter. Or “300”.
In addition, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is “celebration” or “congratulations”, if it is a specification that the AT will continue until the upper limit of 1500 times, “1500-AT digestion game” By calculating the “number of times” by the player, it becomes possible to grasp the remaining number of games of the AT.
In addition, the display of “celebration” or “congratulations” informs the player that the total number of games of the AT has exceeded “1500” and indicates that no further additions will be made. It becomes.

  As in Example 2, Example 3 shows an example in which “500” is added when the number of AT digestion games is “1200” and the remaining number of games is “200”. In Example 3, the number of remaining games of the AT is “+100” (not shown in FIG. 55) and becomes “300”. In other words, the total number of games of the AT has reached “1500” due to the addition this time.

In Example 3, when the total number of games of the AT becomes “1500” or more, the display of both the number of digest games and the remaining number of games of the AT is stopped and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect continues for at least a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games), and is executed until the number of AT digestion games reaches “1500”. If the final video of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of digestion games of the AT reaches “1500”, the final video is continuously displayed or the video is repeated by returning to the beginning of the ending effect. A method is mentioned.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of notifying the player that the number of games is not increased any more.

In Example 4, as shown in Example 2, when only the number of digest games of the AT is displayed and the number of remaining games is displayed as “celebration” or the like, as described above, the player determines that the remaining AT Although the number of games cannot be grasped, for example, when the remaining number of games of the AT becomes “10”, the game information indicating that the AT will not be executed beyond 1500 games, such as “It will end in 10 games.” To display. The “remaining 10 games” shown in Example 4 is an example, and the number of remaining games when the display of the game information is started is arbitrary. By displaying the game information indicating that the number of games played at the AT does not exceed “1500”, the player can know the remaining number of games played at the AT.
In addition, Example 4 can also be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

In addition, when an extra game over 1500 games occurs, the extra production itself may be displayed as “congratulations” or “celebration”.
Furthermore, when an extra game over 1500 games occurs, a privilege image that can be displayed only when an extra game over 1500 games occurs may be displayed.
Furthermore, “occurrence of surplus exceeding 1500 games” may be set as a mission in Myslo games. For example, when “occurrence of surplus exceeding 1500 games” is generated a predetermined number of times, the mission is achieved, and some privilege is given to the player.

In this way, even if an increase exceeding 1,500 games occurs, it is not possible to execute the additional game, but instead, a privilege (profit) for preventing a player's motivation from being lowered is set. It is preferable to keep it.
In particular, when a surplus exceeding 1500 games occurs, it is assumed that a rare role has been won, but when the rare role is won, the production is output because the total number of games is “1500” or more. This is because it is unnatural.
The “Myslo game” is, for example, as described in paragraph number “0680” of “Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-104442”.

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining how the performance changes as the number of AT games increases in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” is set, so that the number of acquired sheets continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). In the example of FIG. 56, for simplification of the graph, the AT continues from the number of games “0G” to “1500G”, and the acquired number continues to increase.
In FIG. 56, (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of AT games and effects.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games, and the vertical axis indicates the number of acquired games. In the example of (a), as shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55, when the number of digestion games in the AT (advantageous section) becomes “1200”, 500 games are added.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section even if the number of remaining games is reached at that time.
In addition, the extra effect is performed up to 1200 games, but when the 500 games are won, the additional effect for the winning is not performed. In addition, even if it is elected for further extras after that, the extra presentation will not be performed.

  On the other hand, the performance related to the AT during the AT continues until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Further, the number of AT digested games and the number of remaining games are displayed up to 1200 games, but at the time of winning 500 games in the 1200th game, the number of AT remaining games is displayed as shown in Example 2 in FIG. Or the display of both the number of digest games and the remaining number of games of the AT as in Example 3 of FIG. 55 is stopped, and other displays (“celebration” shown in Example 2 of FIG. Switch to the ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example of (1) gradually increasing the lottery probability (shown by a solid line in the figure) when the AT continues for “1500” games, and (2) It is a figure which shows the example (it shows with a dotted line in the figure) which decreases instruction | indication frequency gradually.
In the above (1), for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the lottery table A is used until the number of AT games is less than “1000” games. Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), until the number of AT games is less than “1000” games, a lottery is performed with a grade corresponding to the winning combination, but “1000” games or more This corresponds to an example in which a lottery is performed by lowering the winning combination grade.

  Also, in the example of (1), when the number of AT games is less than “500” games, the extra lottery probability is high, and when the number is “500” games or more and less than “1000” games, the extra lottery probability is the normal probability. In the case of “1000” games or more, the extra lottery probability is set to a low probability. Even if the AT addition probability is gradually reduced as the number of games is digested, as long as the AT has the remaining number of games, the rate of increase in the number of games acquired with respect to the number of games does not change. This is the same as FIG. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example (2), the instruction frequency is controlled to be gradually lowered according to the digestion of the number of AT games.
Here, “instruction frequency” means how often the instruction function is activated when the small role group B or small role group C (push order bell) is won during AT (the correct answer push order is determined). Display). For example, when the number of AT games is less than “500” games, the instruction frequency is 100% (instruction frequency “high”), and when the number is “500” games or more and less than “1000” games, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction The frequency is “medium”), and when the game is “1000” or more, the instruction frequency is set to 80% (instruction frequency “low”).

For example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (winning with a probability of 90%) of whether or not to operate the instruction function is executed for the small role B group or the small role C group (push order bell). When the lottery is won, the instruction function is activated.
Also, when the instruction frequency is less than 100%, if the replay duplicate win for promotion or maintenance of RT is selected, the correct answer push order may always be indicated, or the same as the push order bell win. Whether or not to instruct may be determined by frequency.

If the instruction function does not work when replay overlaps, it may fall to disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when Replay C group wins during RT3, Replay 03 is displayed and falls to RT2.
Further, as in the first embodiment, when a pattern symbol is displayed at RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in the example as in the first embodiment, if the instruction function is not activated at the time of pressing the push-bell, there is a case where it falls to disadvantageous RT.
If the instruction frequency is gradually decreased as the number of AT games is exhausted, the number of cases where the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won will gradually increase. It becomes difficult to increase. FIG. 56B (2) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section”.
On the other hand, as in the first embodiment described above, the fourth embodiment described later, etc., it is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (a precursor, CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc. The same shall apply hereinafter). Of course it has.
For example, an advantageous section is started and AT is started after “n” games are executed for the non-AT period.
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous interval has already consumed “n” games.
In this case, when displaying the number of digestion games and the like as shown in FIG. 55, when displaying the number of digestion games in the advantageous section including part or all of the “n” game (example 1), “ The digestion of the “n” game is reflected in an internal counter (such as the upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43 and the like), but the image display is not performed (example 2).
In the case of Example 1, it is a specification that displays the number of digestion games in some or all of the advantageous sections other than AT to the player, and in the case of Example 2, only the number of digestion games of AT is displayed to the player. Become.
Further, in the case of Example 1, a) only the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is displayed (the number of digestion games of AT is not displayed), and b) both the number of digestion games in the advantageous section and the number of digestion games of AT are displayed. The case where it displays is mentioned.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), when the number of games is less than “500”, the extra lottery probability is high, and when the number of games is “500” or more and less than “1000”, the extra lottery is performed. The probability is a normal probability, and when the number of games is "1000" or more, the lottery probability is a low probability.
Here, similarly to the above, it is assumed that the AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after the transition to the advantageous section.
When almost no instruction function operation game is executed from the start of the advantageous section to 600 games, the graph of FIG. 56 is a graph (lower right lowering) in which the acquired number decreases as the number of games is exhausted. Become. Then, when AT starts from 600 games, a graph (upper right corner) in which the number of acquired coins starts increasing at 600 games as a boundary.

  In the above example, since the advantageous section has already consumed 600 games at the start of AT, the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of AT is 900 games. Therefore, when this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, when the number of AT digestion games is less than “300”, the addition lottery probability is high, and when the number of AT digestion games is “300” or more and less than “600”, the addition lottery is performed. The probability is assumed to be a normal probability, and when the number of AT digestion games is “600” or more, it is added and the lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, when an AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after the transition to the advantageous section, for example, in “(c) extra lottery” in FIG. If it is more than or equal to (“Yes” in step S451), setting lottery table B may be used.
Here, the specified number is set to “600” when the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is “900” games as described above, when the number of games is consumed by “2/3”. Is set as a threshold value.
In this way, when the advantageous section is not necessarily AT, for example, when AT is not started at the beginning of the advantageous section and AT is started after a predetermined number of games, an additional expected value (such as an extra lottery probability) is added to the AT game. When changing based on the number of times, it is necessary to make a setting that also takes into account the remaining number of games in the advantageous section.

<Fourth embodiment>
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 includes an external signal transmitting unit 70, and external signals (sometimes referred to as “outer ends”) to the external concentrated terminal board 100. Send. The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized by what kind of external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on / off.
Further, BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA, 1BBB, or the like of 1 embodiment, and BB games are 1BBA games, 1BBB games, or the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating Example 1 (upper stage) and Example 2 (lower stage) of the external signal time chart in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a third example of the time chart of the external signal.
In the example of FIGS. 57 and 58, an external signal 1 indicating that the BB is in operation (in BB game) and an external signal 2 indicating that the AT is being output are output as external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is possible to provide an external signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a signal that is turned on when either AT or special game is satisfied). It is.

  In the third embodiment, the AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, even if the advantageous section is started, the AT is not always started immediately. For example, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, the AT is started. However, the point that the advantageous section is ended when the AT ends is the same as in the third embodiment.

In Example 1 of FIG. 57, AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after starting an advantageous section. When AT is started, the external signal 2 which means AT signal is turned on. It is assumed that BB is won during AT and BB game is started. As the BB game starts, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress is turned on. Note that the AT is suspended based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is resumed after the BB game ends. However, the external signal 2 remains on during the BB game.
When the BB game ends, the external signal 1 is turned off. Thereafter, when the AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. With the end of AT, the advantageous section is also ended (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section are finished before reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
When 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached, the advantageous section and the AT are ended even if the game has the remaining number of games at that time.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 57, the AT is started after the lapse of a predetermined number of games after starting the advantageous section, which is the same as Example 1. In addition, the point which shifted to BB game during AT is the same as Example 1. Example 2 is an example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the BB game. For this reason, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the BB game has not ended yet. And after progress of the termination conditions of an advantageous area, BB game is complete | finished.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress are kept on until the end of the BB game. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. It should be noted that the advantageous section is terminated when the advantageous section termination condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, since AT is executed within the advantageous section, AT is also terminated when the advantageous section ends.
As described above, in Example 2, the AT is terminated when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is an example of turning on even after the end condition of the advantageous section has elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the output of the external signal 2 from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

  As in Example 2, as an example of satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section during the BB game, for example, first, the AT game number is set in advance at the start of the AT, and the game number is in the BB game. Even if it is subtracted. Secondly, there is a case where the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the BB game. For example, when AT is started with the number of AT games set to “50” and the BB game is started during the AT, counting of the number of AT games is interrupted. However, the count of the upper limit “1500” game of the advantageous section is continued even during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of an advantageous section, as in Example 1 of FIG. When the AT is started, the external signal 2 is turned on. In Example 3, it is assumed that BB is not won during the advantageous section (does not shift to BB game).
In addition, the example 3 is an example in which the number of games is added during the AT, and the AT has the remaining number of games even when reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. Even when the number of remaining AT games is reached when 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, are reached, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, the external signal 2 is turned off when the 1500 game that is the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

  If a special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section, and the 1500 game of the advantageous section is finished while the special portion is inside, the special portion where the special role is won and transferred, An effect such as “how many times the special game inside” cannot be output. This is because the data related to the advantageous section is reset when 1500 games reach the advantageous section. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous section (AT) continues even during the special game.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data relating to the advantageous section stored on the main control board 50 side is cleared, but the data relating to the advantageous section stored on the sub control board 80 side (transmitted from the main control board 50). The data stored based on the incoming command) may be cleared or not cleared.
When not clearing, it is also possible to display a numerical value exceeding “1500” for the number of games in the advantageous section during the special game.
Further, when a special role is won at the end of the advantageous section, if an effect such as an ending effect is output, the ending effect may be stopped and the special role may be immediately notified.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or the AT is ended in accordance with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following Example 1 and Example 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section starts simultaneously with the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation are advantageous sections.
Further, both the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation shift to non-RT (this point is different from the first embodiment).

  Non-RT maintains an advantageous interval. Further, in non-RT, the replay A alone is not drawn, and the replay C group is drawn (as in RT3 of the first embodiment). When replay group C is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, Replay 01 or Replay 03 wins by the player's operation (luck) of the stop switch 42. When the replay 01 wins, the process shifts to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when the replay 03 wins, the process shifts to RT2.

Note that when the replay group C is won in the non-RT, the instruction function may not be always operated, and the instruction function may be always operated (the order of pushing for winning the replay 01 is displayed). Or you may determine by lottery whether an instruction | indication function is operated at the time of winning of replay C group.
Or, when the transition is made to non-RT based on the end of the 1BBA operation, the instruction function is activated when the replay C group is elected. It is good also as not operating.

RT5 is a finite RT and 50 games continue. When 50 games are digested at RT5, the process proceeds to RT2.
In the fifth embodiment, RT5 is executed as an advantageous section and AT is executed. On the other hand, when a transition is made from non-RT or RT5 to RT2, a normal section (non-AT) is set.
For this reason, when Replay 01 wins in non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the next game moves to RT5, and the advantageous area and AT (50 games) are executed. And when 50 games are digested, it transfers to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
On the other hand, when Replay 03 wins in non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the next game shifts to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
In RT2, a lottery with an advantageous section and AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the RT transition and AT. (A) has shown the example which transferred to AT. The example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which 1BB is won at RT2 and the game moves to 1BB game without going through RT4 (inside). When shifting from RT2 to 1BB game, an advantageous section is started. Then, when the 1BB game ends, the process shifts to non-RT, and when the replay 01 wins in this non-RT, the process shifts to RT5. In RT5, an AT of 50 games is executed. When the AT of 50 games is finished, the advantageous section and AT are finished and the process proceeds to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 5B, the 1BB game is finished and the game is shifted to non-RT, and the replay 03 is won in this non-RT. In this case, it does not shift to RT5 (AT), shifts to RT2, and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the advantageous section and AT start and end are RT (lottery state), or a control state controlled and managed by the main control board 50 (regardless of whether RT is different or the same). In Example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the advantageous section and AT are started by RT transition, and the advantageous section and AT are ended by RT transition.
On the other hand, in the example 2 of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the AT are started by the transition of the control state, and further, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated by the transition of the control state.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes control states of states 1 to 3. In this example, state 1 and state 2 are advantageous intervals, and state 3 is a normal interval.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly the states when going back and forth between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is so-called normal, state 2 is a warning or pullback period after the end of AT, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery of an advantageous section is executed. For example, the advantageous section lottery is the same as that shown in the first embodiment. And if it wins an advantageous section in state 3 and shifts to an advantageous section, it will shift to the precursor which is state 2. Therefore, when it shifts to a precursor, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
The precursor corresponds to a preparation period until the AT is started. For example, the number of games of the precursor is determined at the time of transition from the state 3 to the state 2, and the precursor of the state 2 stays until the number of games is consumed. To do. Note that the indication function does not operate during the warning. When the number of games in state 2 (precursor) is digested, the next game shifts to AT in state 1. During state 1 (AT), the indicating function is activated.

State 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied. The number of games in state 1 (AT) may be fixed, for example, “50”, or may be added as shown in the third embodiment.
When the termination condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the AT pullback period which is state 2. In the withdrawal period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, “20” games).

When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period of this state 2 (retraction period) (for example, when winning a rare role or winning an AT lottery executed when winning a rare role, for example), state 1 ( AT). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the pull-back period that is in the state 2, the process shifts to the normal state that is in the state 3. Then, at the same time as the transition to the state 3, the advantageous section is ended, and the transition to the normal section is performed.
As described above, when the normal state in the state 3 is set as the normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous sections, and the transition to the advantageous sections, depending on whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT pullback period).

  In the example of FIG. 61A, an upper limit can be set for the number of AT transitions. For example, when the upper limit number of ATs is set to “5”, the state 1 is shifted to the state 3 without shifting to the AT pullback period (state 2) after the end of the fifth AT. It is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61B has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
Usually, it is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during normal times, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and when an advantageous section is won, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section and a precursor is started. The number of precursors is 32 games at the maximum (the number of games of precursors is determined by lottery). And after digesting the number of games of the precursor, it shifts to CZ. The CZ is executed until the transition condition to the AT is satisfied or the end condition of the CZ is satisfied. If the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied during CZ, transition to AT is performed. Further, when the CZ end condition is satisfied before the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to normal.

Specifically, as conditions for shifting to AT during CZ, for example, (a) when winning a transfer lottery according to the winning combination, (b) when winning a transfer lottery performed for each game regardless of the winning combination, (C) When a predetermined specific combination is won, (d) When a predetermined specific combination wins exceeds the specified number, (e) When a specific RT is entered, (f) A predetermined number Various transition conditions according to game play can be defined, such as when a special role is won.
Similarly, the termination conditions for CZ are also (a) if the conditions for transitioning to AT are not met during CZ, (b) if a specific falling combination is won, (c) regardless of the winning combination for each game Various winning conditions according to game play can be defined, for example, when a falling lottery is won.
Furthermore, the transition condition to the AT in the CZ and the termination condition of the CZ mentioned here may be set as conditions opposite to each other.

  AT is executed in the same manner as (a) above. If the AT termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to CZ. The CZ after the end of the AT is positioned in the pull back period (a). If the transition condition to the AT is satisfied again during the CZ, the transition can be made to the AT. However, when the CZ end condition is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to the AT, the transition is performed normally. At the same time as the transition to normal, the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the normal section is performed.

Note that the instruction function operation game is executed during the AT in principle. However, since the state 2 in FIG. 61 (a) or the CZ or the precursor in FIG. 61 (b) is also an advantageous section, the instruction function It is possible to execute an operation game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game after the transition to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. A game won for the role B group may be designated as an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), the first winning game in the small role B group within the 32 games of the precursor may be designated as an instruction function operation game.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having control states of a precursor, CZ, and AT, as in FIG. However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which the transition to AT was not possible is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the transition is made from normal to a precursor, the transition to CZ is made after a predetermined number of games (maximum of 32 games). If the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the transition is made to the AT as shown in (b). However, if the CZ end condition is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to the AT (for example, a predetermined number of games (32 games) ) Digestion) shifts to the withdrawal period. In the pull-back period, the transfer lottery to CZ is performed again, and if the transfer condition to CZ is satisfied before the normal transfer condition (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games) is satisfied), the shift to CZ is performed ( In the figure, (c) shows an example of re-entering CZ (example of successful pullback).

  During the CZ, as described above, the lottery for the transition to the AT is performed. However, when the CZ end condition is satisfied before the condition for the transition to the AT is satisfied, the transition is made again to the withdrawal period. In the example of (c) in the figure, in the second pull-back period, the CZ end condition (for example, digestion of the predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (for example, the pull-back failure) before the condition for transition to CZ is satisfied. This is an example of normal transition.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and end of the advantageous section are controlled with the transition to RT, and AT and the like can be executed freely during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, when a plurality of control states not related to RT are provided, a control state corresponding to normal is set as a normal section, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed during this normal period, and a transition lottery to an advantageous section is won. Transition to one of the control states corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games), and the control state is shifted to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section is ended. The control state is shifted to the normal section.

  In the example of FIG. 61, when AT is executed, ART can be executed if AT is executed with RT having a high probability of replay. Therefore, for example, in the case of realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated at the time of replay B group winning in RT2, and the replay 02 is performed. It is possible to display the push order to be displayed and shift to RT3.

In this way, by arbitrarily determining the end condition of the advantageous section, a plurality of control states (precursors, CZ, AT) can be freely designed. Further, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, it is possible to combine all of them. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of end conditions in one advantageous section, so that a wider range of game play can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60 (a) shows that the advantageous period ends when the number of games played in RT5 during the advantageous period reaches 50 games.
Further, the example of FIG. 60B shows that the advantageous section is ended by shifting from non-RT to RT2 by displaying replay 03 during non-RT. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions of “digestion of 50 games at RT5” and “transition from non-RT to RT2” are set as conditions for ending the advantageous section. In other words, non-RT is positioned like CZ which is promoted to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). The big concept is that the advantageous section is terminated when a specific RT transition is triggered.

Furthermore, the example of FIG. 61 shifts the advantageous section and the normal section depending on the control state regardless of which RT is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61A, state 1 and state 2 (precursor or AT pullback period) are advantageous intervals, and state 3 is set as a normal interval. Then, the transition from state 3 to state 1 or state 2 starts the advantageous section, and the transition from state 1 or state 2 to state 3 indicates that the advantageous section ends.
Similarly, in the examples of FIGS. 61B and 61C, the normal state of the control state is the normal section, and the precursor of the control state, CZ, and AT are the advantageous sections. Then, it is shown that the advantageous section starts by shifting from normal to the precursor, CZ, or AT, and the advantageous section ends by moving from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, when the control state is normal, it is a normal section. However, if the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section is executed. However, the AT is not executed for the precursor or CZ even during the advantageous section, and the AT transition condition must be satisfied by the precursor or CZ or the like for the AT to be executed. On the other hand, even if it falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or falls from CZ to the withdrawal period (precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described in FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples can be given.
(1) An example in which the first finite RT (20 games) and the second finite RT (60 games) are provided, and the end condition of the advantageous section is set to digest the first finite RT or the second finite RT. For example, a benefit to the player can be provided by setting a case where a transition is made from a non-RT in a favorable section to a first finite RT of 20 games and a case where a transition is made to a second finite RT of 60 games. Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn in a non-RT during the advantageous section, and a symbol combination that shifts to the first finite RT or a symbol combination that shifts to the second finite RT is displayed according to the pressing order at the time of winning the specific replay. Let Then, according to the pressing order operated by the player at the time of winning the specific replay, by shifting to the first finite RT of 20 games or the second finite RT of 60 games, it is about 3 It is possible to make the gameability capable of generating a double profit difference.

Further, when the specific replay is won during non-RT, the main control board 50 may notify the player of the pressing order. In that case, considering the winning combination and the game situation before the specific replay winning in the non-RT, there is a specification that determines whether to notify the pushing order of transition to the first finite RT or the second finite RT. It is done. At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may be either one having a setting difference or one having no setting difference.
Furthermore, the end condition of the advantageous section may be set only for the digestion of the first finite RT, and set so that the advantageous section is not terminated by the digestion of the second finite RT. As a result, when a transition is made from a non-RT to a second finite RT of 60 games, the second finite RT and the non-RT can be obtained by shifting to the non-RT again without ending the advantageous section even after the 60 games are digested. It is possible to play a game that loops.

  In this case, when the transition is made from the non-RT to the first finite RT, the advantageous period ends when the 20-game finite RT is digested, but when the transition is made from the non-RT to the second finite RT, the 60-game finite RT ends. After digesting RT, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to shift from non-RT to second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add the advantageous section due to the winning of the role having the setting difference in the advantageous section. However, in the case of such a game, there is a case where there is a setting difference in the specific replay. However, there is no problem because it only serves as a transition to a finite RT with a different number of games. In this way, by devising the end condition of the advantageous section, it is possible to add a substantial 20 games or 60 games by a winning combination having a setting difference (transition of 20 games to the first finite RT, or the second game of 60 games) (Transition to finite RT) can be realized.

(2) An example where the end condition of the advantageous section is set to CZ digestion or transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game. By setting such an end condition of the advantageous section, for example, in the advantageous section A CZ of up to 32 games is executed, and the CZ clearing condition is determined in the special role winning. Then, if 32 games are digested without winning a special role during CZ, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the special role is won during CZ, after the special game is finished, the game is shifted to non-RT, and in the non-RT, the specific replay is drawn in the same manner as in the above (1), and the special replay is selected. According to the order, the symbol combination that shifts to RT1 or the symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed.

  Then, “the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game” is set as an advantageous section end condition. Therefore, when the specific replay win is made and the process shifts to RT1 in the pressing order, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, when the transition from non-RT to RT2 after the end of the special game, AT is started. Here, according to the control state and the winning combination, it is possible to notify the push order of shifting to RT2 when winning a specific replay that does not have a setting difference. This means that the special combination won during the CZ is not limited to a special combination having no setting difference, and may be a special combination having a setting difference. Gameability that can be given AT substantially by winning special roles regardless of the setting difference during CZ in the advantageous section (specify winning during non-RT after the end of special games) It is possible to realize the notification of the pressing order in which the symbol combination to be transferred to RT2 is displayed by replay.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples (1) and (2), the control state is exemplified using RT, but various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), two types of finite RTs (the first finite RT and the second finite RT) having different non-RTs and the number of games are adopted. It may be replaced with state 3. Here, the gaming state is a control state executed during the advantageous section and is the above-described CZ, AT, etc., but the winning probability of replay does not change like RT.
By this replacement, it is possible to obtain a gaming state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, a gaming state 2 in 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and a 60 gaming state 3 in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section. . In addition, as with RT, there are no restrictions on the transition conditions (for example, specific symbol combinations are displayed, special role winning, special role winning, special game termination, game number of times, etc.), so various conditions can be freely set. Can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, in the gaming state 1 in the advantageous section, conditions such as “win a bell five times within 20 games” or “make a bell win three consecutive games” It is also possible to design so as to shift to the gaming state 2 when achieving the above.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, when the advantageous section and the upper limit of 1500 games are approached during the advantageous section and AT, the advantageous section is terminated before reaching the upper limit of 1500 games, and after the advantageous section ends, it is relatively advantageous. By providing a situation where it is easy to win a section and an AT, an advantageous section that does not reach the upper limit number of games and an AT can be repeatedly executed. As a result, it becomes possible to create an advantageous section that is executed up to the upper limit of 1500 games and a more advantageous state than the AT.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing RT transition in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has RT6. RT6 is a finite RT and ends with the digestion of 50 games.
RT6 can be migrated only from RT3. Furthermore, after RT6 ends, the process shifts to non-RT.

  In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except the inside (RT4), the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section. Further, the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed regardless of the winning of the condition device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being linked to the winning of the condition device having no setting difference. The winning probability is “1/32” common to all RTs.

  Also, after the end of 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation, it has the right to execute AT. After the operation of 1BBA is completed, the process shifts to non-RT, and after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. If a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. After that, it goes back and forth between RT2 and RT3 (here, it is assumed that a rare case in which RT3 is accidentally shifted to RT6 is not considered).

  In the above, in the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, since the lottery to the advantageous section is executed with the winning probability of “1/32”, when the lottery to the advantageous section is won, 1BBA operation or 1BBB Under the circumstances where the AT has the right to execute based on the operation, the advantageous section and the AT are started. Since AT can be executed on the condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to activate the instruction function), it is advantageous even if the operation shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB, respectively. Before winning the section, the AT will not start even if you have AT rights.

  When the advantageous section and AT is started in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated when the small role B group is won until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is because the pattern symbols are displayed so as to shift to RT2 as early as possible. When the small role C group is won, the instruction function is activated. After the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the instruction function is activated in both the small role B group and the small role C group winning. In addition, when the replay group B is won in RT2, the instruction function is operated so as to shift to RT3. In this way, the AT is executed until the AT termination condition is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, a replay D group is drawn in place of the replay C group in RT3. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of replay group D to be selected in RT3, the winning combination, and the pressing order and the display combination, and corresponds to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The replay group D includes replays D1 to D3, and the replays D1 to D3 include a replay 01, a replay 03, and a replay 06, respectively.
If one of the replay groups D is won, replay 01 wins in one push order, replay 03 wins in another push order, and replay 06 takes place in another push order. Is set to win.

Here, RT3 is maintained when replay 01 is displayed in RT3, and falls to RT2 when replay 02 is displayed, similar to the replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when Replay 06 wins at RT3, the process proceeds to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, lottery of the replay 06 is not performed during the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, the replay 06 is included only in the replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, if the player stays at RT3 and is in the advantageous section and AT, and the number of games in the advantageous section is less than “1400”, and wins the replay D group, the replay 01 is won. The pushing order to be held, that is, the pushing order for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when staying at RT3 and in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of digestion games in the advantageous section becomes "1400" or more, that is, when the advantageous section remains "100" games or less In the game where the subsequent replay D group is won, the push order for winning the replay 06 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

Thereby, since the replay 06 wins in the game, the game shifts to RT6 from the next game. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set to an advantageous section and an AT end condition. For this reason, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated with the transition to RT6.
As described above, since the replay group D is a replay duplicate winning with the possibility of shifting RT, it is desirable that there is no setting difference (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the replay group D). Does not prevent it).

RT6 is a finite RT and 50 games are executed. When 50 games are consumed in RT6, it is determined that the end condition of RT6 is satisfied, and the process shifts to non-RT.
In addition, as described above, in RT6, as in other RTs, an advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of “1/32”. When the advantageous section is won at RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. In other words, when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more in RT3 and the game moves to RT6, the advantageous section and AT are terminated, and “the winning of the advantageous section lottery in RT6” is executed (resumed). ) The condition is set.
In RT6, since the winning probability of the advantageous section is “1/32” and the number of games is “50”, the probability of winning the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

  When an advantageous section is won at RT6, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game, and the execution condition of AT is satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started during the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, that is, while staying at RT6. Alternatively, it may be started from non-RT when transitioning to non-RT, or AT may be started after transitioning from non-RT to RT2. Here, for simplification of explanation, it is assumed that the AT is started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section.

  In RT6, if the advantageous section and the AT are started simultaneously from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, the AT can be continued up to the limit of 1500 games which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Can do. Even in the control state such as precursors and CZs performed during the advantageous section, 1500 games in the advantageous section are counted, so AT is compared with the game performance in which AT is performed via such control state. It is possible to execute for a long time.

  When RT6 ends, the process shifts to non-RT. Non-RT continues until the pattern symbol is displayed. And if a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, it will transfer to RT2. When the advantageous section lottery is won at RT6, the instruction function is operated when the replay group B is won at RT2, and the push order to shift to RT3 is displayed.

Then, when the AT is won at RT6, the AT is executed while maintaining RT3 when shifting to RT3. AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the AT is completed a predetermined number of games, the AT is terminated and the advantageous section is terminated, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Note that the number of AT games is determined at the time of AT winning, and the number of games is added by the above-described addition during AT execution. Then, during the execution of AT, when the advantage section becomes 1400 games or more after the start of the advantageous section, the process shifts to RT6 as described above.

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the advantageous section lottery is also performed at the winning probability of “1/32” at RT2 and RT3. That is, in the sixth embodiment, even when staying at any RT except RT4, the advantageous section lottery is performed with a probability of “1/32”, and when the advantageous section lottery is won, the advantageous section from the next game is played. Migrate to

In RT2 and RT3, when only transitioning to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of the first small role B group winning. As a result, since the condition that allows the advantageous section of “execution of at least one instruction function operation game” to be completed is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 or RT3 (normal section) that does not go through 1BBA game or 1BBB game, the advantageous section is drawn with the winning probability of “1/32”, and when the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game, and the advantage When the instruction function operation game is executed once in the section (when the small role B group is selected), the transition to the normal section from the next game is repeated.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a transition is made to the advantageous section, a predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) may be continued, and the transition to the normal section may be made after the predetermined number of games is consumed. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in a predetermined number of games.

In addition, AT lottery is separately executed in RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal). And when this AT lottery is won, he has the right to execute AT. For example, when winning the small role E1 shown in the first embodiment, it is possible to have an AT execution right. Alternatively, when the small role E1 is won, whether or not to grant the AT execution right is determined by lottery, and when the lottery is won, the AT execution right may be granted.
The AT game count is initially set to an initial value, and thereafter, as shown in the third embodiment, an extra lottery is performed and the game count is added.

Further, if the game won for the AT is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. Note that the AT may be started from the next game of the game won by the AT, or as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started after passing through the precursor or the CZ. After the AT is started, the AT is executed while staying at RT3 (ART) in the same manner as described above. If the AT continues even after 1400 games have been played since the transition to the advantageous section, the transition is made to RT6 as described above.
On the other hand, if the game won by the AT is a normal section, the player waits for winning an advantageous section while having the AT execution right. And if it wins an advantageous area, AT will be performed after that.

In addition, when the AT lottery is performed as described above during the stay of RT2 or RT3, it is possible to set the AT start condition to pass through RT6.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, the “right to execute AT” is granted based on winning of the small role E1 and the like. When this right is won, if it is not an advantageous section, it waits to win an advantageous section. The push order to move to RT3 at the time of winning is displayed. Furthermore, when it is RT3, the push order which transfers to RT6 at the time of replay D group winning is displayed. When the process proceeds to RT6, the advantageous section ends as described above. Then, when an advantageous section is won among 50 games of RT6, the AT start condition is satisfied. The flow after the AT start condition is satisfied in RT6 is the same as described above.

  The advantageous section lottery is not limited to the above, and a special combination having a winning probability of “1/32” may be drawn in all RTs, and the advantageous division may be started based on winning the specific combination. . Note that the specific combination in this case is a combination having no setting difference as described in the first embodiment.

When the above sixth embodiment is arranged again, it has the following features (including effects).
(1) Before reaching the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is intentionally terminated and the advantageous section is redrawn, so that the 1500 games that are the upper limit of the advantageous section are effectively increased. Beyond that, it becomes possible to execute the advantageous section. For example, a game such as “advantageous section (1200 games) → non-advantageous section (50 games) → advantageous section (1200 games)” becomes possible.
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the transition from RT3 to RT6 ends, but during the 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability is A highly advantageous state can be maintained.
(2) In addition, during normal times, each game has a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section with a winning probability of “1/32”. In particular, as an opportunity to move to the advantageous section, a transition opportunity that does not have a setting difference is necessary. However, in both RT6 and normal time, the lottery to move to the advantageous section always with a winning probability of “1/32” It is possible to realize it.

Furthermore, depending on the design, it is possible to set “AT start = start of advantageous section” as in the third embodiment. Therefore, 1500 games that are the maximum number of games in the advantageous section are fully used, for example, 1500 games. The AT can be realized (except when the AT is started when the special role is elected).
(3) At the time of shifting to an advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT with reference to the RT being executed. The winning lottery is drawn with the winning probability of each game “1/32”, but when winning the winning lottery, refer to the RT (RT6 or not) that was staying at that win. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT when shifting to the advantageous section.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, as a result of adding the number of games during the AT, even when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the player is benefited. As the number of times that the number of games exceeds “1500” is increased, the player is more advantageous.

The seventh embodiment includes a “greater than 1500 counter” that counts the number of times that the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” due to the addition during the AT. At an advantageous interval and at the start of AT, the counter value exceeding 1500 is “0”.
In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (example 2) of the third embodiment, when the total number of games of AT exceeds “1500” as a result of the extra lottery, the determined extra number is displayed. It shall be cleared without adding.

  Accordingly, when the total number of games of the AT is “1500” or less, the counter exceeding 1500 remains “0”. Here, for example, if it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44B that the added number exceeds the specified number, “over 1500 counter” is changed from “0” to “1”. Similarly, in step S451 of FIG. 44B, if it is determined that the added number exceeds the specified number, “over 1500 counter” is changed from “1” to “2”. In this way, the counter exceeding 1500 is incremented every time the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the advantageous section and AT is started, the game at the time of winning the first small role B group wins the instruction function. After that, when the counter exceeding 1500 is “0”, that is, when the total number of games of the AT has not exceeded “1500” by lottery, is the instruction function activated at the time of winning the small role B group? Determine whether or not by lottery.
Here, the ratio of operating the instruction function when winning the small role B group is referred to as “instruction function operation rate”.

  The instruction function activation rate when the counter exceeding 1500 is “0” is set to “95%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is won, for example, a lottery (lottery to win at 95%) of whether to operate the instruction function is performed. Thereby, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 95%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is activated is 100% and that the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is not activated is “1/3”, the instruction function operating rate is 95%. The winning rate of the small role B group at is about 96.7%.

  Next, it is assumed that the total number of AT games exceeds “1500” as a result of the addition during the AT. It is assumed that the counter exceeding 1500 becomes “1”. Here, the instruction function operating rate when the counter exceeding 1500 is “1” is set to “97.5%”. Accordingly, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is selected, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 97.5%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 2.5%.

Thereafter, as a result of further addition, when the total number of AT games exceeds “1500” once again, the counter exceeding 1500 becomes “2”. In this case, the instruction function operating rate is set to “98.75%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is selected, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 98.75%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, the instruction function operation rate = “95”, “97.5”, “98.75” with respect to the counter value exceeding 1500 = “0”, “1”, “2”,. It is determined that ...

  If the setting is made as described above, the instruction function operating rate approaches 100% as much as the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, that is, the counter value exceeding 1500 increases. Here, even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually “1500”, so it can be said that the games exceeding “1500” cannot be executed. It is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when the AT total number of games exceeds “1500”, it is more advantageous to the player than before the addition (expected number of games to be acquired) It is possible to set so as to increase the value.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, BB wins that do not have a setting difference in the winning probabilities (1BBA single win, 1BBA and small role D overlapping win, 1BBA and small role E1 overlapping, taking the first embodiment as an example) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on (winning), the advantageous section is started after that. In addition, there is a case where AT is started after the end of the BB game.
Further, examples of the end of the advantageous section can include the following Examples 1 to 5.
(1) An example where the advantageous section ends before the end of 1BB game (example 1)
(2) An example where the advantageous section ends at the end of 1BB game (example 2)
(3) An example where the advantageous period does not end at the end of 1BB game and AT starts after the end of 1BB game, and the advantageous period also ends at the end of AT (example 3)
(4) An example where the advantageous period does not end when the 1BB game ends and the advantageous period ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed since the end of the 1BB game (example 4)
(5) An example in which the advantageous period does not end at the end of 1BB game, and AT starts after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the end of 1BB game, and the advantageous period also ends at the end of AT (Example 5)
Then, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is simultaneously determined which of the first to fifth examples ends the advantageous section. Of course, it does not have to be determined from the five examples 1 to 5, but may be determined from the three examples 1 to 3, for example, or may be determined from the two examples 2 and 3. May be.

64 to 66 are time charts showing Examples 1 to 5 described above.
In Example 1 of FIG. 64, after winning 1BBA, an advantageous section is started from the start of 1BBA game (when 1BBA is activated). The start timing of this advantageous section is at the start of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, the next game of the game won by 1BBA from the start of the next game of the game won by 1BBA ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing as long as it is until the start of the first game of the 1BBA game. Further, as described in the first embodiment, when starting an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In addition, the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, but since the 1BBA is being operated, the AT has not started (in the first example, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

In Example 1, before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, at the end of the previous game of the final game of the 1BBA game, or at the start of the final game of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section is ended.
Furthermore, in this example 1, the output of continuous production is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. Similar to the first embodiment, the continuous production is a series of productions over a plurality of games (production that raises the expectation as to whether or not AT is executed after the end of the 1BBA game), and at the end of the continuous production, An effect that informs the player whether or not to start the AT after the end of the 1BBA game is output. Further, the advantageous section ends with the end of the continuous performance.

Therefore, in Example 1, in the middle of the last game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous performance is ended (finally, notification that AT is not started), and at the end of the game where the continuous performance is ended or continuously When the production ends, the advantageous section ends. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of 1BBA game, even if it was decided to end the advantageous section before the end of 1BBA game, a rare role (for example, small role D) was won during 1BBA game, etc. If an advantageous section extension condition (also referred to as an advantageous section change condition; the same applies hereinafter) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not terminated before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section can be changed from Example 1 to Example 3.

  Example 2 in FIG. 64 is an example in which the end of the 1BBA game and the end of the advantageous section are matched. In this example 2, as in example 1, the continuous production starts from the middle of the 1BBA game, and at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (the last stop switch 42 may be operated, etc.), the 1BBA game It is notified whether or not the AT game is to be started after the end of. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends simultaneously with the end of the 1BBA game, the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous performance, a notification that AT is not started is notified.

In addition, as in Example 1 and Example 2, when the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game), the advantageous section is ended even if the instruction function operation game is not performed once. Making it possible. This is because during the special game (1BBA game), a large number of medals have already been acquired, and it is not necessary to extend the end of the advantageous section only for one instruction function operation game. Rather, it may increase player dissatisfaction.
Similarly to Example 1, when the 1BBA game is started, even when it is decided to end the advantageous section at the end of the 1BBA game, when the advantageous section extension condition is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when a rare combination is won), the advantageous section may not be ended at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section may be changed from Example 2 to Example 3.

In Example 3 of FIG. 65, as in Example 2, the continuous performance starts from the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example in which AT is started after the end of 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (may be when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), the fact that the AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game is notified. Then, the AT is started from the next game of the last game of the 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start the AT immediately after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from a game that has transitioned to RT3, a next game that has transitioned to RT3, or a next game that has won one of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting AT.
Note that the AT ends when an AT end condition is satisfied, such as digestion of a predetermined number of games, and the advantageous section ends simultaneously when the AT ends. However, even after the AT is finished, the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

  It is not known at the start of 1BBA game whether the above example 1 or example 2 or example 3 is started, but at the start of 1BBA game, since the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section. When determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at the start of the 1BBA game (determined to shift to the advantageous section) or not lit (advantageous section), as was always made in Example 3. It is possible to increase the player's expectation even during the 1BBA game.

  Example 4 in FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, and starts a continuous performance after the end of the 1BBA game. In the continuous performance, whether or not the AT is started from now on (the advantageous section continues) This is an example of notifying whether or not to do. After the end of the 1BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and Example 4 shows an example in which five continuous effects are performed. Of course, any number of games may be performed for the continuous performance. And it is alert | reported whether AT will be started by the last game of a continuous production. Example 4 shows an example in which AT is not started. The advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous performance. Of course, the continuous performance may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from one game after another.

As described above, in Example 4, the advantageous interval is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous interval is executed for 5 games during the normal game (the game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”.
Here, based on the winning of the BB, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section starts at the same time as the BB game (of course, it may not be the same), the BB game ends. Later, when ending an advantageous section in several games, the following control may be considered.

(1) If the small group B is never won in 5 games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game once.
(2) When the small role B group is won in 5 games, the designated function operation game is executed in the game.
(3) Even when the small role group B is won for 5 games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game.
(4) If you have never won the small role B group among 5 games, you will be extended until you win the first small role B group, and you will be instructed when you first win the small role B group A function-operated game is executed, and the advantageous section is terminated in the game.
Any control among the above may be used.
As described above, since it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”, the control of (1) to (3) may seem unfavorable. In this way, when a BB game is being played during an advantageous section, since many medals have already been acquired during the BB game, the end of the advantageous section can be terminated only for one instruction function operation game. This is because there is no need to extend it. Rather, it may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, a case where an instruction is given (execution of an instruction function operation game) is indicated between two games by a two-dot chain line.

In Example 5 of FIG. 66, similarly to Example 4, the advantageous section continues after the end of the 1BBA game, and after the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous effect is started, and whether or not the AT is started with the continuous effect is determined. This is an example of notification. In Example 5, the fact that the AT is to be started is notified in the final game of the continuous performance. Then, the AT is started from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, it is not necessary to start AT from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from a game that has transitioned to RT3, a next game that has transitioned to RT3, or a next game that has won one of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting AT.
It is not known at the start of 1BBA game whether it is the above example 4 or example 5, but at the start of 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, so during 1BBA game and after the end of 1BB game It is possible to beat the player's expectation.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not to execute AT (Examples 1 to 5), and the initial number of games of AT are before the start of 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or the start of 1BBA game Sometimes it may be decided by lottery or the like, or it may be decided whether or not to execute AT based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. For example, when 1BBA is won, it is decided to be Example 1, 2 or 4 and based on the condition device won during 1BBA game, it is decided whether to change to Example 3 or 5 . For example, when “1BBA + small role E1” in the first embodiment is won, AT determination may be made (example 3 or example 5).
Further, based on the conditions satisfied during the 1BBA game, whether or not to execute AT and the initial number of games of AT may be determined. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), the number of games played by the AT may be added during the 1BBA game or during the AT based on the winning of the condition device.
Furthermore, it was determined as in Example 4 at the start of the 1BBA game, but when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game or during the continuous performance period of 5 games after the end of the 1BBA game (for example, You may change to Example 5 (performing AT) at the time of winning a rare role.

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the AT is executed after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, whether or not AT is executed after the end of the 1BBA game is determined depending on whether or not the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When deciding whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as in Example 2 of FIG. When it is determined that the AT is executed during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is executed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment defines when to start an advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section) when starting an advantageous section based on the winning of a condition device including a special role (for example, 1BBA). In particular, it is characterized in that an advantageous section is started from a game in which the winning special role can be won.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the condition unit including the special role (1BBA) is won, and the advantageous section is started based on the decision to move to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the condition device including the special role is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the betable state and the checkable state are set in the next game of the won game. The betting is possible in the next game of the game in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination stops (or the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stops) The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until it becomes ready to be settled and ready to be settled.

Also, the advantageous section starts when the next game of the game won by the condition device including the special role (when the start switch 41 is operated) or when the first game of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) starts ( (When the start switch 41 was operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role, the start timing varies.
The ninth embodiment is characterized in that when the condition device including the special combination is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section starts from the game in which the special combination can be won. To do.

Therefore, for example, in the first embodiment, when 1BBA is elected alone, 1BBA can be won in the game, so an advantageous section starts from the game.
On the other hand, when “1BBA + small role E1” is won, the winning combination of the small role E1 is prioritized in the game, and the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA cannot be stopped. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game won “1BBA + small role E1”, the winning of the small role E1 has priority over 1BBA, and the small role E1 is “PB = 1”. 1BBA will not win. The 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

  Furthermore, when “1 BBA + small role D” is won, the winning of the small role D is given priority in the game, but the small role 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small role D is “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the symbol ("Watermelon") relating to the small role 35 cannot be stopped and at a timing at which the symbol ("Red 7") relating to 1BBA can be stopped, Winning is possible. For example, in FIG. 5, the middle first switch is operated, and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position where both the symbols of 1BBA and the small role 35 can be stopped, priority is given to stopping the symbols related to the small role 35. For example, it is the case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which it is possible to stop at the effective line for both the second “red 7” and the fifth “watermelon” in the right first stop.
On the other hand, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “red 7” of No. 7 can be stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop at the left, the “watermelon” of No. 4 or 9 is stopped on the active line. Therefore, No. 7 “Red 7” does not stop at the active line.
For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above-described timing, stop control that does not substantially stop No. 7 “Red 7” on the active line is executed. Thereby, the game at the time of winning “1BBA + small role D” in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to “a game that can win 1BBA”. Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the middle first switch is stopped and the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line, 1BBA can be won in the game, so “1BBA It is good also as a game that can win a prize

  In the case where the condition device including the special role is elected and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the game does not fall into a game that can win the special role, in the lottery of the condition device in the next game, for example, When it is not won, a special role carrying over the winning can be won, so an advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, the condition device lottery is performed when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game and is not won, so the advantageous section immediately after the start switch 41 is operated and the condition device lottery is performed. (At the same time or immediately before that, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit).

On the other hand, in the next game, for example, a small role or replay is won, and the winning of the small role or replay won in the game is given priority. As a result, in the game where the special role cannot be won, the advantageous section is not started.
Also, for example, in a game in which a special role is carried over, in a game in which a small role with “PB ≠ 1” is won and the special role cannot be won, As in the case of winning the “1BBA + small role D” described above, the advantageous section is not started in the game. Of course, in a game in which a special combination that has won the prize can be won, an advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the flow of games in the ninth embodiment. In the example of FIG. 67, “1BBA + small role E1” is won in the “N” game, and 1BBA wins in the “N + 3” game.
First, when “1BBA + small role E1” is won in the “N” game, only the small role E1 can win a prize in the game, and 1BBA cannot win a prize. Therefore, an advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, after the “N + 1” game, 1BBA has been won. In the “N + 1” game, an example of winning Replay A is shown. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins with “PB = 1”, and 1 BBA overtaking the winning cannot be won, so the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, in the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the winning lottery by the winning lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA carrying over the winning can be awarded. Therefore, the advantageous section starts from the “N + 2” game. Here, at the start of the “N + 2” game, that is, based on the fact that the start switch 41 is operated and the condition device lottery is performed, so that it is not won (1BBA can be won). Since the section is started, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also started when the start switch 41 is operated.

  A player who has won 1 BBA in the “N + 2” game can eliminate useless use of the number of games in the advantageous section. As described above, the player who won 1BBA in the “N + 2” game is an internal game that cannot be added (including whether or not to execute AT in the eighth embodiment) It is not necessary to start an advantageous section. Further, as described above, the upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games) is set for the advantageous section, and if the advantageous section starts in the internal middle game, the maximum advantageous that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game. The number of games in the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the internal medium game. For example, if you play 10 games in the internal game, 1 game in the game that won 1 BBA, and 16 games in the 1BBA game, the game after the end of 1BBA game will only play 1473 games in the advantageous section at the maximum. I can't do it.

  However, the player who won 1BBA in the “N + 2” game has no amount of spending in the internal game (0 games in the internal game, 1 game in the game in which 1BBA was won, 1 game in the 1BBA game) In the game after the end of the 1BBA game, a maximum of 1483 games can also be played in the advantageous section), so than the player who could not win 1BBA in the “N + 2” game May be advantageous. On the other hand, the player who could not win 1BBA in the “N + 2” game will continue the game in the inside while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example where 1 BBA could not be won in the “N + 2” game.

  Further, in the case of the “N + 3” game, as in the case of the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the winning lottery by the winning lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA carrying over the winning can be awarded. The example shows that 1 BBA can be won in the “N + 3” game. Thereby, the 1BBA game is started from the “N + 4” game.

Here, for example, if the setting is made so that the advantageous section starts at the beginning of the 1BBA game, the number of games varies depending on the player's main skill from the time of winning the 1BBA until winning (the consumption of medals). However, there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the player's skill (whether or not he / she notices the winning of the special role or knows that the special role is won, becomes a special role without any mistakes. Depending on whether or not the corresponding symbol combination can be stopped on the active line, the number of games in the advantageous section that is wasted changes.

For example, if the special role can be won in the first game in which the special role can be won, the advantageous zone is not wasted in the internal middle game after starting the advantageous zone.
On the other hand, in the first game where the special role can be won, if the special role cannot be won due to failure to push, etc., the game will be able to win the special role again after the next game. It is necessary to wait until. However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special combination can be won, the advantageous section is also consumed in the meantime.
In this way, the substantial number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games after the end of the special game) can be varied according to the skill of the player.

As modifications of the ninth embodiment, for example, the following examples are given.
(Modification 1)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when it shifts to the waiting section), the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. And, when the game that digests the number of games, the next game, or the special game starts (the next game of the game where the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped), whichever comes first, shifts to the advantageous section .
(Modification 2)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when it shifts to the waiting section), the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game moves to the advantageous section in the earlier one of the game in which the number of games has been digested or the next game, or the first game in which the winning special role can be won.

(Modification 3)
Even when the advantageous section is started from the first game in which the selected special combination can be won, the end condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that an advantageous section in which an AT of 50 games is executed after the special game is won based on the winning of the special role. In this case, with respect to the AT of 50 games after the end of the special game, 50 games are counted simultaneously with the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the advantageous period starts from the first game in which the selected special combination can be won, the AT 50 games start counting simultaneously with the start of AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the “1500” game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is counted from the first game in which the selected special combination can be won. In this way, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the number of AT games is increased, etc.), the game is affected by the skill of the player.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when a conditional device including a special combination is won and it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, the advantageous section starts from a game in which the special combination can be won, The advantageous section may be started from the next game of the game in which the special role can be won (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the next game can bet and settle. ). In this way, when the special role is won in the first game where the special role can be won, the game that won the special role is not counted as a game in the advantageous section. May be more advantageous than a non-skilled player.

  In the ninth embodiment, a game won in a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including a special role (1BBA), or a continuous performance (special role (over 3 games) from the next game to multiple games (for example, 3 games). (1BBA) is an effect that tells whether or not it has been won, and an effect indicating that the special game (1BBA) has been won in the last game) may be output. Of course, a game won in a conditional device (for example, small role E1) that does not include a special role (1BBA), or a continuous performance (special role (1BBA)) from the next game to multiple games (for example, 3 games) is won. It is necessary to output an effect that indicates whether or not a special role (1BBA) is not won in the last game).

  And, when a continuous production is output (especially before the production showing that the special role (1BBA) is won, for example, 2 games when a continuous production over 3 games is output from the next game) When 1BBA can be won in the eye (that is, “N + 2” game)), it becomes clear that the player has won 1BBA by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 for that game. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1 BBA has been won may be output. When it is the last game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be output as it is, or an effect indicating that 1BBA has been won may be output instead of the continuous effect.

  Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which continuous effects are output, even if 1 BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be lit. Specifically, a game that has won a conditional device (for example, 1 BBA + small role E1) including a special role (1BBA), or a predetermined number of games from the next game (the number of games equal to or greater than the number of games for which a continuous effect is output) During this period, even if the special role (1BBA) can win, the advantageous section is not started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on), but after the predetermined number of games, the special role (1BBA) can be won first. From this point on, an advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also lit).

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when 1BBA is won during AT execution (that is, during an advantageous section) and the game shifts to 1BBA game, the game shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to AT) after the completion of the 1BBA game. Sometimes, it is possible to add the number of AT games (that is, the number of games in the advantageous section).
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when the AT is executed at RT3 (for example, when it is decided to shift to the AT of 100 games (ie, advantageous section) at the time of winning the small role E1 and the AT is executed), Assume that 1BBA has been won (either 1BBA single win or 1BBA and double win E1). When 1BBA is won, if 1BBA is not won in the game, the process proceeds to RT4 (inside). And when 1BBA wins, it shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game). When the end condition of 1BBA operation (1BBA game) is satisfied, the process shifts to non-RT.

  When the 1BBA game is finished and the game is shifted to non-RT, the AT is restarted from that point, or the AT is being prepared (for example, any of the game that has shifted to RT3, the next game of the game that has shifted to RT3, or the replay B group) The AT is resumed from the next game of the game that won the crab, etc. Therefore, it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even during the AT preparation even before the AT is started. Of course, it is an advantageous section even during AT preparation.) When the AT is set to start from that point, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the process proceeds to RT2. When one of the replay B groups is won at RT2, the instruction function is activated to display the push order for winning the replay 02. When Replay 02 wins at RT2, the process proceeds to RT3. Thereafter, the AT is continued while maintaining RT3. When the setting is made during the AT preparation until RT2, the AT is basically resumed after the transition to RT3.

  Here, based on the transition from RT2 to RT3, the number of AT games (that is, an advantageous section) can be added. This addition may always be executed, or it may be determined whether or not to add by lottery. As an opportunity to add, the Replay B group wins (that is, it will be added even if it does not shift from RT2 to RT3. Of course, when AT is being prepared, AT can be started from this point in time) Preferable)), winning of Replay 02, and transition from RT2 to RT3.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the addition can be executed based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via non-RT after completion of the 1BBA game. For this reason, 1BBA winning, 1BBA game execution, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, it may be stored using a flag. Then, when shifting from RT2 to RT3 (when the Replay B group is won or when Replay 02 wins), it is determined whether or not the flag is on, and that it is on. It is possible to add the number of AT games to the condition. In addition, when an extra or extra lottery is executed, the flag is turned from on to off.

  In this way, if it is determined whether or not the addition is possible using the flag, for example, a state in which only RT2 and RT3 are going back and forth (simply pushing in the wrong order during execution of AT, transition to RT2, At the time of shifting to RT3 again), since the flag is off, it is not added when shifting from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example, but even when 1BBB, that is, a conditional device including a special combination having a setting difference is won, if it is added as described above, it can be executed.
Similarly to the above, the winning of 1BBB, the execution of 1BBB game, or the stay of RT1 is stored in the flag. Then, after the end of 1BBB game, the transition from RT1 to RT2 and further to RT3 (when replay B group is won or when replay 02 wins) may be added. . Thus, even when 1BBB having a setting difference that cannot be added during winning or during BB game is won (when transitioning to 1BBB game), the player is expected to add up. Can do.

Further, the addition may be performed based on the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, it is possible to make the addition possible based on winning the small role B group in non-RT or RT1, or displaying a pattern symbol, or shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, the process shifts to non-RT even when the RWM 53 is initialized. However, as the RWM 53 is initialized, the above-mentioned flag is turned off. Even if it does, the addition is not executed. In the first place, if it is a normal section, the addition is not executed.
In addition, when 1BBA or 1BBB is won during execution of AT and the game moves to RT4 (inside), the number of AT games is not added at RT4.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (the first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, the process shifts to non-RT, and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following method is also possible.
After the end of the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT5 (new addition). Then, in RT5, a condition device that becomes a winning combination of a plurality of replays is drawn in a lottery, the condition device is won, and it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on a predetermined replay winning. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the display of the pattern symbol. Further, the setting is made so as not to shift to RT5 from non-RT, RT2, or RT3.
In this way, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (the fact that the condition device was won at RT5, the predetermined replay was displayed, the small group B was won at RT5, and the pattern symbol was displayed. Or the transition from RT5 to RT3), it is possible to add the number of AT games, and there is no need to provide a flag as described above.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small role E1, when winning in the normal section, the small role E1 (numerical value “250”) that shifts to the advantageous section and winning in the normal section Is also provided with a small part E1 (numerical value “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when any of the small roles E1 is won in the normal section, it shifts to the advantageous section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small combination E1 with the set number “250” is referred to as “small combination E1a”, and the small combination E1 with the set number “750” is referred to as “small combination E1b”.
Further, the small roles E2, 1BBA and the small role E2 are deleted.
By doing in this way, in the game in which the small role 36 has won, the next game is surely shifted to the advantageous section (by that time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit).

Further, the advantageous section when winning the small role E1b is an advantageous section that can be ended only by executing the instruction function operation game once (for example, the instruction function operation game is ended after five executions). is there. Such an advantageous section may be referred to as an AT gas precursor in the AT precursor.
On the other hand, the advantageous section when winning the small role E1a is an advantageous section in which the AT is executed after the AT omen, and the number of games is after the AT omen (by the way, the AT omen plays one instruction function operation game) It will be set to 50 games). The count of 50 games may be started immediately after the AT sign, may be started when transitioning to RT3 (or the next game), or when the replay group B is won (or the next game). You may start at the time of staying at RT3 (or the next game). Furthermore, during the 50 games, when the condition device (small role B group, small role C group, replay B group, or replay C group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

  In addition, there is a small combination E1 (place number “250”) that shifts to the advantageous section, a small combination E1 (place number “750”) that does not move to the advantageous section, and a small combination E2 that does not move to the advantageous section. When winning the small role E1 (number “250”) to shift to the advantageous section, when shifting to the advantageous section where the AT of 50 games can be executed, from the game where the small role 36 won or the next game Thus, there is no point in outputting a continuous effect for encouraging the player's sense of expectation as in the past. This is because it can be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by checking whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. The eleventh embodiment has been conceived for outputting a continuous performance for encouraging the player's expectation as in the prior art.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing advantageous sections and the like at the time of winning the small combination E1b (example 1) and the small combination E1a (example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small role E1b is won, an advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit). Then, wait until the small role B group is won. After the start of the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the advantageous push order is displayed in the game won in the first small role B group (execution of the instruction function operation game). A continuous effect is output from the next game of the instruction function operation game (the AT sign is also present during the continuous effect). Of course, a continuous effect may be output from the instruction function operation game. In this example, the continuous effect is executed for 5 games. Then, in the fifth game, an effect is output as to whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues thereafter. At the time of winning the small role E1b, it is possible to end the advantageous section (AT precursor) in one instruction function operation game, so the advantageous section (AT precursor) ends at the game where the continuous performance has ended, and the normal section is shifted to .
In addition, when the small role B group is further won among the five games in the continuous production, the instruction function operation game may be executed, but in this embodiment, the instruction function operation game is not executed.

On the other hand, in the example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small role E1a is won, the advantageous section is started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit), and the instruction function operation game is executed with the game won in the first small combination B group, A continuous performance (5 games) from the next game is output (the same as the case of winning the small role E1b). Then, when the small role E1a is won, an effect that means that the advantageous section (AT) is continued after the fifth game of the continuous effect is output. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the end of the continuous performance.
In addition, when the small role B group is further won among the five games during the continuous performance, the instruction function operation game is not executed as in the case of the small role E1b winning. Of course, after winning the small role E1b, if you play the designated function operation game when you win the small role B group among the 5 games in the continuous production after winning the small role E1b, It is preferable that the instruction function operation game is executed even when the small role group B is won among the five games during the continuous production. In this way, when the small role E1b is won and when the small role E1a is won, the instruction function operation game is executed or not executed during the continuous production, but accordingly, This is because it can be determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT) thereafter.

Here, it is determined that an AT of 50 games is executed when the small role E1a is won. Instead of this, the advantageous section (AT with no AT sign) may be terminated at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (next game at the time of winning the small role E1a). Alternatively, after the transition to the advantageous section, 50 games may be counted by setting the first instruction function operation game as the first game (until the previous game of this game is an AT precursor, and AT is started from this game).
Also, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game won in the winning combination (group of replay B including replay 02) that can be transferred to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22). In the case of 50 games from the next game winning the replay that can be transferred to a specific RT, the push order for transferring to the specific RT is notified in the game won in the replay B group. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game won in the replay B group (even if the replay 02 is not displayed), an AT of 50 games will be executed from the next game. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a strategy such that the player performs a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

  Furthermore, in the specification that the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game won for the small role E1a, when the small role E1a is won in a situation where the player is staying at a specific RT, another game is started from the specific RT. Notification for maintaining a specific RT when winning a winning combination (Pattern symbols 01 to 03 or winning combination capable of displaying replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) May be performed. The AT count may be started from a game that has been notified to maintain a specific RT, or may be a predetermined game after the notification to maintain a specific RT (next game may be used). ). By setting in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of games until a transition is made to a specific RT after a transition to another RT, so it is advantageous for the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). It is possible to increase opportunities to give games.

In the above example, although the small effect E1a and the small role E1b are both won, the continuous production is 5 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a game (1 game) which outputs the effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50 games, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, when the small role E1b (place number “750”) is won, an advantageous period (AT after the AT sign) is executed after the AT sign, and when the small role E1a (place number “250”) is won, 1 It is good also as the advantageous area (AT precursor) which can be complete | finished by the instruction | indication function action | operation game of 1 time.

Further, when the small role E1a is elected, the number of games “m” of the AT is determined, and when the small role E1a and the small role E1b are elected, the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game can be executed is determined. Determine by lottery. When the number of games “n” is determined, the instruction function is not activated until the number of games “n” elapses even when the small group B is won. After the number of games “n” has elapsed, the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small role B group.
In addition, for example, “n1” and “n2” (n1 <n2) are included as the determined number of games “n”, and when the number of games of the determined AT is “m1” at the time of winning the small role E1a “N1” may be easily determined, and when the determined number of AT games is “m2” larger than “m1”, “n2” may be easily determined. Further, “n1” may be easily determined even when the small combination E1b is won. Furthermore, “n1” may be more easily determined when the small role E1b is won than when the determined number of AT games is “m1” when the small role E1a is won.
In this way, after the transition to the advantageous section, the longer the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the number of AT games is determined, You can expect. Of course, as the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed is shorter, the possibility that the number of games of a larger AT is determined may be increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a continuous performance is output from the next game at the time of winning the first small role B group. The reason for this is that, as in the prior art, a continuous effect is simply output from the next game of the game winning the small role E1a or the small role E1b (5 consecutive games are executed). The advantageous section (AT) when winning the small role E1a may be that the AT after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor ends with 5 games) ends with 50 games. Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when E1b is won ends in 5 games, if the instruction function operation game is not executed once in 5 games, Thereafter, there is a possibility that inconvenience may occur that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end in spite of the output indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is not continued.

  Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning the small role E1b ends with one instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the fifth game of the continuous performance. However, there is a possibility that inconveniences such as the end of the advantageous section (AT precursor) in the third game of the continuous production and the advantage section (AT precursor) of the fifth or subsequent game of the continuous presentation may not be completed. Because there is. Of course, even if the advantage section (AT precursor) when winning the small role E1b is ended in 5 games after the execution of the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of the continuous performance. This is because there is a possibility that an inconvenience such that the advantageous section (AT sign) does not end even after the fifth game of the continuous performance is not necessarily performed.

However, the advantageous section (AT) when winning the small role E1a is assumed that the AT after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor ends with one execution of the instruction function operation game) ends with 50 games, If the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning the small role E1b is to be ended in one instruction function operation game, the continuous production will start from the game that started the advantageous section, regardless of which is won. The continuous production continues until the first small role B group wins, and when the first small role B group wins, the instruction function is activated, and the advantageous section (AT ) May be notified whether or not to continue.
When this is done, since the number of games until the first small role B group is won is indefinite, the effect image means that the continuous effect used in the game that continues the continuous effect continues, and the advantageous section An effect image that means that (AT) is not continued and an effect image that means that the advantageous section (AT) is continued may be prepared and a continuous effect may be output.
In addition, when winning a small role E1a (possible a small role E1b) during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous performance) based on winning the small role E1b (for example, during a continuous performance) It may be changed to execute (continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Example 3 and Example 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small role E1 is won, the continuous effect is not output until the first small role B group wins, and the continuous effect is output from the next game when the small role B group is won.
On the other hand, Example 3 in FIG. 69 does not output a continuous production until the first small role B group wins, such as when the small role E1 wins, and from the next game at the time of the small role B group wins This is an example of starting an advantageous section that ends when an AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when winning the small role E1 instead of outputting a continuous effect. Of course, the end condition of the advantageous section in Example 3 is not limited to this, and an AT of 30 games (the number of games is free) is executed after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor may end with five games, etc.) In addition, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied. Of course, it is also possible to start advantageous sections with different end conditions depending on when the small combination E1a is won and when the small combination E1b is won.

  Furthermore, when the small combination E1 is won, there may be a case where the advantageous section is started and a case where the advantageous section is not started. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, after the start of the advantageous section, until the end condition of the advantageous section that was initially set (for example, AT of 30 games is executed), the small role B group is never won. This is an example. If the small role B group is won before reaching the advantageous section end condition and the instruction function operation game is executed, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. When the end condition is reached (when AT of 30 games is executed), the advantageous section is ended.

  On the other hand, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, if the instruction function operation game has not been executed once (for example, the player has never won the small role B group), then the small role B At least the advantageous section will be extended until the group is won and the instruction function operation game is executed. Example 3 in FIG. 69 shows an example in which the advantageous section is extended, and thereafter the instruction function operation game is executed (winning the small role B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. In Example 3, the advantageous section ends after less than 1500 games from the beginning of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in Example 4 of FIG. 69, since the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is not executed once (without winning the small role B group) 1500, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section 1500 This is an example of reaching a game. In other words, the end condition of the advantageous section has been reached. It is an example when it reaches.
In the rare case as in Example 4, unlike the case of Example 3, even if the instruction function operation game is not executed once, the advantageous section is terminated when the upper limit is reached. This gives priority to "when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached" the advantageous section is ended "rather than" at least one instruction function operation game is executed during the advantageous section ". It is to do. Because, as in the case of Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section has not been reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if a rare role such as the small part E1 is won in the meantime, Although it is possible to add an extra (of course, it is not necessary), as in Example 4, even if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, depending on the rare role won during that period , Because it is not possible to add an advantageous section, for the player, the normal section will be more advantageous (if a rare role is won during the normal section, a new advantageous section will start. Because there is).

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantageous section is continued until 1500 games whose upper limit is the upper limit (for example, when the small role E1 or the like is won and added, etc. are performed during the advantageous section that has been started and it is determined that the advantageous section will continue. Or when an ending effect is output from, for example, the 1450th game (when the upper limit is approached) It is characterized (the point of outputting an ending effect is the same as that of Example 3 in FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). The game is not limited to 1450 games, and various settings such as 1400 games and 1470 games can be set.
The ending effect starts from the 1450th game and ends at the 1500th game. Here, the “ending effect” is, for example, a moving image, which is also referred to as a movie image, and is not divided for each game (a moving image with a predetermined time instead of switching images for each unit game). .

  By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays in the shortest time, it can be watched to the end in exactly 50 games (game where the advantageous section ends). When it reaches the end, it repeats from the beginning thereafter, or the last image is displayed as a still image. Thus, it is preferable to set the ending effect to such a length that the player can watch until the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays in the shortest time. At the end of the ending production (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals won in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) indicate. Of course, the total number of medals won in the advantageous section (total number of acquisitions), the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted (total number of acquisition differences), and the total number of games (1500 games) It may be displayed not as the last of the game, but as another effect that is output after that (such as an effect that is output during the freeze executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)) .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example of starting an ending effect from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, ending the ending effect at the 1500th game, and ending the advantageous section.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, etc. of the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section and 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, the 1450th game in the advantageous section has not been reached. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect is started from the 1450th game, and the ending effect is ended at the 1500th game (the ending effect ends together with the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, in FIG. 70, (b) shows an example in which, after starting the ending effect from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, 1BB is won in the 1490th game and the 1BB game is executed. And the example at the time of completion | finish of 1BB game exceeded 1500 game which is the upper limit of an advantageous area is shown.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception in the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended with 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). By the way, freezing is not executed even when the advantageous section ends. Accordingly, the advantageous section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues after the advantageous section ends (which is a normal section).

  In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). Because, as shown in (a), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached when the 1BB game is not being played, it is advantageous that the effect is output at the end of the ending effect or during the freeze when the advantageous section ends. It is necessary to display the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the section (particularly, the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of games acquired in the AT, etc.). On the other hand, as shown in (b), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game, since the 1BB game is executed after that (the normal section), the ending effect ends at this point. In this way, freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or when the advantageous section ends, and the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section are displayed in the effect that is output during the freeze. This is because it also hinders the game and is not preferable.

  In the first place, at the end of 1BB game, freeze is performed at the end of 1BB game or at the end of 1BB game, and in the output that is output during the freeze, the total number of games and total number of games during 1BB game Since the acquired number is displayed, in the case of (b), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the ending effect is not ended at this point, and when the 1BB game is ended, End the ending effect, and execute freeze at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the 1BB game. In the effect that is output during the freeze, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired etc. It is more preferable to display the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of acquired games during the AT, etc. .

  In addition, since the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is a 1BB game in the normal section, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the advantageous section (especially executed in the advantageous section) If you want to display the number of AT sets, total number of games during AT, total number of games acquired during AT, etc., the total number of games and total number of games acquired during that period (normal zone and 1BB game) should not be included. However, if the display is not strictly concerned, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during that period (in the normal section and during the 1BB game) may be displayed. There is a player's satisfaction when the display is included. For example, the advantageous section can be executed only up to 1500 games, but since the display exceeds 1500 games, there is satisfaction.

  Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the 1BB game are displayed together with the ending effect, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous zone (especially the advantageous zone) Is displayed during the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section. Will continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (example 3) described above, at the time of outputting the ending effect, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during 1BB game, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during the advantageous section, etc. If the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of games acquired in the AT, etc.) are not displayed, during the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set so that even if the player plays in the shortest, the game can be seen to the end by the game when the advantageous section ends ( Repeat from the beginning, or display the last image as a still image), but when the ending effect is output even after the advantageous section ends as in the example of (b), the ending effect is repeated from the beginning, or The last image of the ending effect can be displayed as a still image.
The ending effect is not to switch images for each unit game (separate for each game), but for a predetermined time, a moving image for each predetermined number of games, a still image for each game, or Any of still images divided for each predetermined number of games may be used.

<13th Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, RT transition similar to that in FIG. 22 shown in the first embodiment is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized by the following points.
(1) The winning probabilities of the condition devices (replay B group, replay C group, and small role B group) related to the RT transition should not have a set difference.
(2) Based on having won the replay group B in the non-RT or RT2 that has shifted from RT1, an advantageous section is added (possible). On the other hand, when transitioning from RT3 to RT2, when transitioning from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of Replay A is set to have a set difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small role D is set to have a set difference.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a numeric table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device for “small role D” is provided in FIG. 17, but in this embodiment, since the small role D has a setting difference, the small role D is stored in the numeric table (2 ). In the thirteenth embodiment as well, a table of numbers (1) similar to that shown in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (there is no number of small roles D).

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when transferring from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small role B group and display the pattern symbols. Here, in order to display the pattern symbol, it is necessary to win the small role B group. And when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role B group, the ease of transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 varies depending on the set value (the ease of transition from RT3 to RT2 also varies). ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1, the winning probability of the small role group B is set so as not to have a set difference. In the example of FIG. 71, the numbers of the small combination B1 to the small combination B12 are set to “770” in common for all settings (not limited to this value). In order to make the appearance rates of the small combinations B1 to B12 the same, all the small combinations B1 to B12 have the same number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the replay B group is drawn only at RT2, and the numbers of replays B1 to B3 are all “2800” common to all settings. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3, and the numbers of replays C1 to C3 are all “12000” common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the RT 2 that has shifted from non-RT or RT 1, the advantageous section is added when the replay B group is won (it may be displayed when the replay 02 is displayed or when RT 2 is shifted to RT 3). It should be noted that the advantageous section may be added at any time, or whether or not to be added may be determined by lottery. Further, the added number of games may be a fixed number of games determined in advance, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

  Note that “addition of advantageous section” can be replaced with “addition of AT” in all the embodiments. For example, when a special role is won during an AT (for example, the remaining number of games of the AT is “5”), and when the replay B group is won in the non-RT or RT2 after the special game is finished, When an extra lottery that increases the number of remaining AT games is executed and the lottery is won, the number of remaining AT games can be increased (for example, the number of remaining AT games can be set to “25”).

In addition, in RT2 which shifted from non-RT or RT1, it is similar to 10th Embodiment mentioned above to perform the addition of an advantageous area at the time of replay B group winning.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the replay group B is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability (numerical value). Therefore, it is possible to add the advantageous section in association with the winning of the conditional device. Thereby, it can avoid having a setting difference in the probability to add.
Similarly to the tenth embodiment, when the transition is made from RT3 to RT2, even if the RT2 wins the replay group B (even if the replay 02 is displayed or the transition is made from RT2 to RT3) , Do not add the advantageous section.
Furthermore, at RT2, when the Replay B group is won, RT2 is maintained or the process proceeds to RT3. Therefore, the replay group B becomes a conditional device capable of shifting RT. Since the replay group B is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT2 to RT3 (ease of shifting).

  In RT3, when Replay C group is won, RT3 is maintained or the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the replay group C becomes a conditional device capable of shifting RT. Since the replay group C is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT3 to RT2 (the ease of transfer).

Similarly, when the small role B group is won in non-RT, RT1, or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the small role group B becomes a conditional device capable of shifting RT. The small role group B is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, so that there is no setting difference in the probability (easy to move) from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2. can do.
Note that the small role group C does not correspond to a conditional device capable of shifting RT, and thus may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the RT transition rate is not affected by the setting difference by not giving a setting difference to the winning probability of the condition device (condition device related to RT transition) that enables RT transition. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) that shifts based on the winning of special role is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probabilities of “1BBA + small role E2”, 1BBB, “1BBB + small role D” have a setting difference, but RT4 (internal ) Is an exception (may be affected by setting differences). This is because RT4 (inside the inside) shifts based on the winning of the special role, and does not shift according to the player's pushing order, and therefore has different properties from those described above. Furthermore, since RT4 (inside) is intended to stay only for a short period until 1BB is won, the property is different from that described above. In addition, RT4 (inside the interior) cannot determine the transition to the advantageous section even if it is in the normal section in the first place. This is because there is no setting difference in the probability of transition or the probability of addition.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is a set difference in the winning probability (number) of Replay A. Replay A has a different winning probability (number) for each RT. Since RT does not shift when Replay A is won, even if a setting difference is provided, the RT transition rate is not affected. Thus, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the probability of replaying. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including replaying, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the payout rate. Get higher.
In the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of Replay A is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. For this reason, setting 6 can make the non-winning probability (probability of losing) lower than setting 1, so that the payout rate can be increased accordingly.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small role E1, when winning in the normal section, the small role E1 (numerical value “250”) that shifts to the advantageous section and winning in the normal section Is also provided with a small part E1 (numerical value “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section. If a small role E1 with a number “250” is elected, an advantageous section in which an AT of 50 games is executed (a count of 50 games may start immediately, or when the game moves to RT3 (or the next game) ), You may start when you win the Replay B group (or the next game), or you may start with staying at RT3 (or the next game)) Suppose that it is determined to shift (otherly, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied). Even with the same 50 game ATs, a new medal is inserted when the winning probability of Replay A is high (low probability of non-winning) than when the winning probability of Replay A is low (high probability of non-winning) Since there is no need to (consume), the payout rate increases accordingly. Thus, even if there is no setting difference in the probability of determining to move to the advantageous section, it is possible to make a setting difference in the payout rate in the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17, the small role D is a conditional device that has no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition device has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the payout number when the small combination D is won and the small combination 35 (watermelon) wins is set to 15 (5 in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small combination D is a small combination having the maximum payout number among the small combinations.

  Further, since the small combination 35 related to the small combination D is “PB ≠ 1”, the small combination 35 cannot be won without winning. For this reason, for example, when the small role D is won, an effect suggesting that the small role D is won may be output, such as performing a green notification. In this case, when the winning combination “PB ≠ 1” wins the condition device that allows winning, outputting the effect suggesting the winning is not “operation of the instruction function”. It is true that there is a case where the small role 35 wins and a case where the small role 35 does not win at the timing of the push. However, the small role 35 is correct without being missed regardless of whether the small role D is won or not. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is possible to always win. In this respect, unlike the small combination B group of the present invention, it differs from the small combination having different winning rates depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated. For example, in order to win the small role 01 at the time of winning the small role B1, if the player always operates with the left first, the small role 01 cannot be won at the time of winning the small role B5.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the “watermelon” of No. 4, 9, or 14 in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the “watermelon” of No. 8 or No. 13 can stop on the active line (the right reel 31 may be at any timing because “watermelon” is “PB = 1”), The small part 35 can always be won (without any notification).
In the invention of the present application, there is no “PB ≠ 1” role other than the small role 35 (not including the incorrect answer in the pushing order when winning the small role B group), so each game is stopped at the above timing. If the switch 42 is operated, no small portion 35 is lost.
From the above, the game at the time of winning the small role D does not correspond to the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention.

As a result, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device that is the maximum payout by the operation of the instruction function at least once during the advantageous section. The “conditional device with the maximum payout” is not the small combination D but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small role E1 (two payouts) is provided as a conditional device that does not have a setting difference.

From the above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small role D: Has a setting difference (15 payouts)
Winning probability of small role B group: no difference in setting (when pushing correct, 9 payouts)
Winning probability for small role E1: No difference in setting (2 payouts)
The relationship between the number of payouts
Small part D> Small part B group (at correct push order)> Small part E1
It becomes.

  Temporarily, if the game at the time of winning the small role D corresponds to the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention (the winning combination is different depending on whether the instruction function is activated or not) ), The “conditional device that gives maximum payout when the instruction function is activated” becomes the small combination D instead of the small combination B group. Then, since the winning probability of the small role D is low, it may happen that the small role D is not won frequently until the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (cannot be ended even though the advantageous section is desired to end). However, if the winning probability of the small role D is increased (if it is higher than the winning probability of the small role B group), it is highly likely that the small role D is simultaneously won with 1BBB (rare role). (In most cases, in the single winning of the small role D, there is no expectation of duplicate winning with 1BBB).

For this reason, the payout number when the small role D wins must be smaller than the payout number when the small role B group pushes the correct answer. Then, even if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role D, there is no significant change in the payout rate (since a small role with a large number of payouts has a setting difference, the payout rate changes greatly. Because it will do). However, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role B group with a large number of payouts in the correct push order, this will cause a setting difference in the ease of RT transition.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, using the small role D with a large number of payouts, the payout rate varies depending on the set value (the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate (the higher the payout rate depending on the set value). It is possible to prevent the RT transition from being affected by the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small part D is “PB ≠ 1”. However, for example, if “watermelon” is arranged in “PB = 1” for all reels 31, regardless of the player's intention (the player's You will be able to win a prize (regardless of skill).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, since the small role D has a case where the winning combination overlaps with 1BBB, the higher setting makes it easier for the small role 35 to appear, and when the small role 35 appears, the winning of 1BBB is expected. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to “1”, the probability that 1 BBB is elected when the small role 35 appears is “20/520” = “0.038 (about 3.8%). ) ”And the set value is set to“ 6 ”, the probability that 1 BBB is elected when the small role 35 appears is“ 25/625 ”=“ 0.040 (about 4.0%) ) ”. Therefore, when the small role 35 appears, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the 1BBB is won. Therefore, the player is provided with an element for estimating the set value, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is increased. You can also.

  In addition, as it can be said in all the embodiments, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 71, it is free to place “X” in “○”, and “X”. It is free to set the location to “O” unless the condition device has a setting difference and is won only in a specific RT (RT4, during 1BBA game, except during 1BBB game). It is free to set “Δ” for the part that is marked as long as the condition device has no setting difference.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the fourteenth embodiment, after an advantageous section is started and before the advantageous section ends (before the end condition is reached), a condition (an advantageous section extension condition) for changing the advantageous section ending condition is satisfied. Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, when the number of games (initial value) in the advantageous section is 30 games at the start of the advantageous section (for example, when the previous game is winning the small role D in the first embodiment), the advantageous section is advantageous. When a section extension condition (for example, winning of the small role E1 in the first embodiment) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the fourteenth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but various other end conditions of the advantageous section described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart for explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In the example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of the first small role B group winning. In Example 1, the number of games in the advantageous section set first is 30 games. Example 1 shows an example in which “50” is added to the number of games while satisfying the extension condition of the advantageous section during these 30 games. When the extension condition is not satisfied between the first 30 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game as shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

  In this case, when at least one instruction function operation game is executed at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if the small role B group is never won, that is, 1 Even if the instruction function operation game is not executed once, the advantageous section can be ended. This is because one instruction function operation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the number of games in the advantageous section initially set is 30 games, and during this 30 games, the conditions for extending the advantageous section are satisfied and 50 games are extended. An example is shown.
In Example 2, in the first 30 games and the extended 50 games (total 80 games), the small role B group was never won (that is, the instruction function operation game was never executed). It is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (80 games have been reached), the advantageous section is not terminated.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when winning the small role B group between the extended 50 games and executing the instruction function operation game (two-dot chain line A in the figure), it is advantageous for the extended 50 games Can be terminated (two-dot chain line B in the figure).
On the other hand, if there is a total of 80 games, that is, if the instruction function operation game has not been executed once from the start of the advantageous section, it waits for winning the small role B group, and if the small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated Run a game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is set to 30 games, and the extended number of games is set to 50 games. However, in these advantageous sections, the Gasse AT precursor (for example, to CZ or AT) If the transition conditions are not met, the game ends in 32 games (the number of games is free), or ends in one (the number of times is free) instruction function operation game), AT precursor (for example, the transition conditions to AT Even if not satisfied, after AT 32 games (the number of games is free), it will be an AT of 50 games (the number of games is free, the start timing of the number of games may be applied to the above-mentioned various timings, etc.) , CZ (for example, a game that ends with 10 games (the number of games is free) if it does not meet the conditions for transition to AT, or a game that ends with one instruction function operation game) With signs In addition, it is easy to satisfy the conditions for transition to AT, and AT (if the extension condition is not satisfied, 30 games (the number of games is free, and the above-mentioned various timings may be applied to the start timing of the number of games) Etc.) and the like can be provided in various ways.

  For example, at the start of the advantageous section, it shifts to CZ (corresponding to “30” game in FIG. 72), and when the transition condition to AT (corresponding to “extension condition”) is satisfied in this CZ, AT (“50 (Equivalent to extending the game)) (extending the end condition of the advantageous section). On the other hand, when the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied during CZ, the advantageous section is terminated when the termination condition for CZ is satisfied, and transition to a normal section (normal to CZ, AT, etc.) is performed (example). 1 and a two-dot chain line).

In addition to the above,
(1) If the first advantageous section is CZ (for example, the game ends in 30 games) and the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, CZ with a longer number of games (add 20 times to the number of games) ).
(2) The first advantageous section is defined as “an advantageous section (GASE AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a predetermined number of times (for example, one time) instruction function operation game”, and an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. When the extension condition (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, winning of the small role E1, etc.) is satisfied, CZ (the predetermined number of games, or the instruction function operation game ends at a predetermined number), Or, change to AT (one that ends with a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is defined as “an advantageous section (Gase AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a predetermined number of times (for example, one time) instruction function operation game”, and an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. When an extension condition (extension condition or CZ transition condition) is satisfied, “an advantageous section (Gasse AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a plurality of (for example, three) instruction function operation games more than a predetermined number of times” Change to
(4) The first advantageous section is set as 30-game AT, and when the extended condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, it is changed to 100-game AT (the number of games is added by “70”).
And so on.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games of the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function operation game is executed only when the first small role B group is won, and thereafter (30 games from the first game) is the small role B group. Even if the player wins, the instruction function operation game may not be executed.
On the other hand, two or more instruction function operation games may be executed during CZ (between 30 games).
Further, even when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, if the instruction function operation game is already executed once during the CZ, the instruction function operation game is not executed in the subsequent AT. May be. In addition, the same applies when the condition for transition to CZ or AT is satisfied during the GASE AT precursor. That is, it is only necessary to execute one instruction function operation game from the start to the end of the advantageous section.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized by having a case where freeze is executed and a case where it is not executed when the advantageous section is ended.
FIG. 73 is a time chart showing the relationship between advantageous sections and freezes in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is decided to execute the advantageous section (for example, when the small role E1 is won), CZ is started at the beginning of the advantageous section. When the condition for transition to AT is satisfied during CZ, AT is started after CZ ends. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, while others start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, the first CZ (advantageous section) does not satisfy the transition condition to the AT, and the advantageous section ends only with CZ. The next CZ (advantageous section) is an example in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT are satisfied, AT is executed after the completion of CZ, and AT and the advantageous section are terminated. When the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the CZ may be immediately terminated and the AT may be performed, or the CZ may be terminated and the AT may be performed. Not limited to the embodiment).
Although not shown in FIG. 73, even when the process is ended only by CZ, since it has shifted to the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when the first CZ ends (when AT is not executed after CZ ends and the advantageous section is ended), freezing is not executed (two-dot chain line in the figure). On the other hand, when shifting from CZ to AT, freeze is performed at the end of AT (advantageous section).
Further, at the time of freezing, at least the total number of AT games and the total number of acquired games are displayed as images. Of course, the image including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the CZ may be displayed, and when shifting from the CZ to the AT via the AT precursor, the CZ and / or the AT precursor An image including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games may be displayed.

In this way, it is determined in advance in which advantageous section the freeze is executed at the end, and in which advantageous section the freeze is executed at the end.
For example, as expected values such as the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the advantageous section, the first end condition (for example, the end of the advantageous section only with CZ (which may be a sign of GASE AT)) and the expected value than the first end condition Has a large second end condition (for example, when AT is executed after CZ or when only AT is executed), when the advantageous section is terminated with the first end condition, the freeze is not executed and the advantageous section is not executed. Is executed when the process is terminated under the second termination condition. This is because the freeze is executed until the expected value such as the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the advantageous section is small (for example, the total number of games is 10 games, the total number of games acquired is 12 cards, etc.). If the image of the total number of images acquired or the like is displayed as an image, there is a high possibility that the player's feeling of regret will be increased (the interest will be reduced).
Even in advantageous sections, unlike AT, there are some that do not aim to give a lot of medals to a player (to increase the total number of winnings), such as GASE AT precursor, AT precursor, and CZ. It is not preferable to perform freezing uniformly at the end of the advantageous section.

  In addition, as determination of whether to perform freeze, providing a freeze flag is mentioned, for example. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ, but is turned on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. When it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. It is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on immediately before ending the advantageous section. If it is on, the freeze is executed. When the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag is displayed. It may be initialized.

By controlling in this way, an advantageous section is started, but in an advantageous section that does not bring much benefit to the player, such as when ending with only CZ, it is possible to prevent freezing at the end.
In addition, information (“1” to “4”, etc.) for specifying the type of advantageous section (CZ, Gasse AT precursor, AT precursor, AT, etc.) or “0” to “4” including the normal section, etc. For example, “0” is a normal section, “1” is a CZ, “2” is a Gase AT precursor, “3” is an AT precursor, “4” is an AT, and the like. Then, this information may be determined at the end of the advantageous section or immediately before the advantageous section is ended, and the freeze may be executed.

  The freeze is not limited to one time. For example, when an AT executes 50 games as one break, a freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if it is an AT of 100 games), and the AT continues after the next game during the execution of the freeze. An output of whether or not to perform is mentioned. In addition, for every 50 games, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired at that time can be displayed as an image, and an effect can be output as if the advantageous section has ended (it was an AT of 50 games).

In addition, when the AT reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of acquired games, etc. are displayed as images. .
Also in this case, if CZ or AT precursor is executed before AT is executed, an image including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games during CZ and / or AT precursor may be displayed as an image. Good.
In addition, during the execution of CZ and AT precursor, when the game reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, during the advantageous section (part of the advantageous section such as CZ) Alternatively, the total number of games or the total number of acquired games may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the game reaches the upper limit of 1,500 games during the 1BB operation (for example, the 1BB operates during the AT and the 1BB operates. When the 1500 game is reached, etc.), the freeze is not executed when the 1500 game is reached (because the 1BB game is in progress), and the freeze is executed at the end of the 1BB game. The total number of images acquired is displayed as an image).
When the freeze is executed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the freeze is completed. Of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off before the freeze is performed, or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off during the freeze. The initialization timing is the same as the timing of turning off the advantageous section display LED 77.

In FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a conditional device that ends the advantageous section only with CZ, and a conditional device that is determined to execute both CZ and AT. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small role E1 alone winning the set number “750” is selected as an advantageous interval that ends only with CZ, CZ and AT are selected when the small role E1 only winning the number “250” is selected. Is an advantageous interval for executing By setting in this way, it is possible to decide to execute AT without performing lottery of whether or not the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during CZ (may be performed only in an advantageous section that ends only with CZ). In addition, it is possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute AT before several games before CZ ends. In this case as well, whether or not to perform freeze is as described above.

The third to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. 50 may transmit parameters necessary for display in the advantageous section (AT) on the side of the sub-control board 80 (digestion game count, remaining game count, additional number, acquired number, instruction function activation count, etc.). .

(2) In FIG. 43 to FIG. 52, parameters relating to the number of games (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) are transmitted to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the acquired number of sheets (for example, 3000 sheets), information on each game and the acquired number of sheets is transmitted.
In addition, each game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is in an advantageous section and information indicating that it is in an AT, and counts the number of games in the advantageous section and AT to the sub-control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub-control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, the lottery tables A and B are provided as the lottery tables used in the extra lottery, and the lottery used depending on whether or not the specified number is “1000” or more. Switched table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of lottery tables may be provided. Moreover, although the prescribed number “1000” is exemplified as the threshold value, it is not limited to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different expected values to be added. When the specified number (the number of AT games) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used. When the specified number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used, and when the specified number is 1000 or more and less than 1300. Uses the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Examples 1 to 3 in FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit, it is peculiar when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit. Although the information is displayed, it is not limited to these examples 1 to 3,
a) Display that allows the player to identify that the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) Display different from the display before the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit What is necessary is just to be a thing and it is not limited to the display content of Examples 1 to 3.

  (5) Further, in Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games of AT exceeds 1500 games due to the addition, the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed. Information on the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed, such as changing the display font of the number of remaining games, changing the character size, or changing the display color, etc., but adding it by changing the display mode This may notify the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded 1500 games.

  (6) In Example 4 of FIG. 55, when there are only a few remaining advantageous sections (AT), a message such as “I will end in 10 games” was displayed, but at the beginning of the advantageous section (AT) , “This advantageous section (AT) can not be performed beyond 1500 games”, it is also possible to make a prior notification.

  (7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, for example, when the slot machine has a specification in which the advantageous section does not match the AT, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, it is possible to transmit an external signal capable of distinguishing between “non-favorable interval (non-AT)”, “advantageous interval and non-AT”, and “advantageous interval and AT” using two external signals.

(8) In the fourth embodiment, BB is won immediately before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, and when the BB game starts, the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after reaching the upper limit (for example, advantageous) When it is 1501 game from the start of the section), the BB game in the non-advantageous section is started, only the external signal 1 (BB) is turned on, and the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (advantageous section and AT Is finished).
Also, when the end of the BB game is when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately before the upper limit is reached (for example, 1499th game from the start of the advantageous section), For example, turning off the external signal 2 (AT) at the same time as turning off the signal 1 (BB) (terminating the advantageous period and AT).

  (9) In the fifth embodiment, AT, CZ, precursor, and normal are exemplified as the control state controlled by the main control board 50. For example, an additional special zone that shifts when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide. This additional specialization zone is continued until, for example, a predetermined number of games are digested or a predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times, and during that period, every time a condition device (for example, small role B group) to be added is won. , Increase the number of AT games.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, in the example of (a) in FIG. 61, after the end of AT (state 1), the state is shifted to the AT withdrawal period (state 2), and AT cannot be pulled back in this state 2 Was transferred to normal (state 3). Further, in the example of (b), after the AT ends, the process shifts to CZ, and when the AT cannot be pulled back in this CZ, the process shifts to normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after the end of CZ, it is shifted to the CZ pullback period, and when CZ cannot be pulled back during this CZ pullback period, it is shifted to normal.
However, the state transition described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in FIG. 61A, after the end of AT (state 1), the state may be shifted to normal (state 3) without going through the AT pullback period (state 2).
In FIG. 61 (b), transition may be made from normal → CZ → AT, or from normal → predictive → AT. After the AT ends, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or from AT to the precursor (CZ pullback period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), the process may be shifted from normal to CZ without going through the precursor. Further, it may be shifted from CZ to normal without going through a pullback period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the output of the continuous effect is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game. You may continue to output the effect of whether or not to start.
Also, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and the effect of finally informing whether or not the AT is started may be output until the first half of the 1BBA game. Alternatively, during the continuous effect, an effect that the execution of AT is confirmed when the effect is output may be provided, and the effect may be output in the middle of the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous effect is not necessarily a necessary effect. For this reason, whether or not to output a continuous effect is arbitrary. Further, for example, it is possible to output only one game as to whether or not to continue the advantageous section.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when an advantageous section is started based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the instruction function may be activated when the small combination B group is selected in RT4 (inside). . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the payout rate at RT4 exceeds "1". In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from the time of RT4 which is the next game of the game won for the special role.
On the other hand, if the instruction function is not activated even after the transition to RT4, an advantageous section may be started before the start of the special game.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, it is designed so that the winning probability of the AT addition lottery on the main control board 50 is reduced, or the addition effect on the sub control board 80 is suppressed. By doing so, it is possible to achieve a game that does not discourage the player as much as possible even when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches.
As another method, there is a method of changing the execution probability of the freeze effect based on the number of executed games in the advantageous section so that the player is not discouraged as much as possible. For example, in FIG. 17, when the small role E1 with the number “250” is won, the added number of games is “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). It is set to increase the possibility that the freeze effect is executed as the number of added games increases.

In such a specification, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), if “200” is determined as the number of additional games, a freeze effect is performed with probability X (including 100%). When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, if “200” is determined as the additional number of games, the freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X.
By configuring in this way, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be lowered, and the player can be prevented from being excessively beaten by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is executed.
(14) Each of the above-described embodiments is not limited to being implemented alone, and a plurality of embodiments can be combined and implemented as appropriate.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification and the like of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 26, and solve the problems to be solved by the original inventions and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. Means for achieving this and the effects of the initial invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not meant to be limited to the initial inventions 1 to 26.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. In such a case, it is required to perform appropriate control.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the player from giving an impression that a game can be played beyond the upper limit when the designated game section (AT) is extended and the upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded. is there.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 1 (the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (third embodiment; example 2 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not exceeded even if the instruction game section is extended, predetermined information regarding the extension of the instruction game section (AT remaining game after addition) Count)
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the instruction game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section will be exceeded, or the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When determined, specific information (“celebration”, “congratulations”, etc.) different from the predetermined information is displayed.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The production control means includes
As the predetermined information, information that can grasp how much the instruction game section is extended is displayed (a specific number of games is displayed),
As the specific information, it is possible to grasp that some decision regarding the extension of the designated game section has been made, but information that cannot be grasped about the degree of the extension of the designated game section is displayed (a specific number of games is displayed). do not do)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 1 According to the original invention, when the instruction game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is decided, the predetermined information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that the player is not misunderstood if the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; example 3 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, the effect control means determines that the indicated game section is the advantageous section when the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached a predetermined threshold (the total number of AT games is 1500 games). It is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that suggests that the continuation upper limit is approached.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, an effect indicating that the designated game section is approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section is output, so that the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section The player can be informed that he will not.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (third embodiment; example 1 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the extension condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not exceeded even if the instruction game section is extended, information on extension of the instruction game section (number of remaining AT games after addition) is displayed. ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the instruction game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section will be exceeded, or the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When it is determined, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after the addition) is not displayed.

(C) Effect of the original invention 3 According to the original invention, when the designated game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded, or after the designated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is determined, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section.

4). Initial invention 4
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (third embodiment; example 4 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the extension condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is characterized by displaying game information indicating that the designated game section is not executed beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (such as “I will finish in 10 games”).

The second solving means is the first solving means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, the effect control means may extend the instruction game section when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When the extension of the designated game section is determined, the game information is displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the indicated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 5 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when the upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, there is a possibility that the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. It is necessary to eliminate.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the designated game section (such as AT) from exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
After starting the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached (for example, “Yes” in step S443 in FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended.
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to decide whether to extend the designated game section,
When it is decided to extend the designated game section, when the designated game section has reached the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section before the extension is decided (for example, when “Yes” in step S451 in FIG. 44), The decision result concerning the extension is cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, even if it is decided to extend the designated game section, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, the decision result relating to the extension is obtained. Since it clears, it can prevent that an instruction | indication game area exceeds the continuation upper limit of an advantageous area.

6). Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it difficult for the designated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
After starting the advantageous section, if you reach the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games), end the advantageous section,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to decide whether to extend the designated game section,
An extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the extent of extension of the designated game section is provided,
The extension determination table is
at least,
A first extension determination table (lottery table A in FIGS. 47 to 49);
A second extension determination table (a lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) having a smaller expected value of the extent of extension to be determined (addition number) than the first extension determination table;
The degree of extension is determined using the first extension determination table until the designated game section or advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), and the designated game section or advantageous section is the predetermined threshold. When reaching, the extension degree is determined using the second extension determination table.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the degree of extension is determined using the extension determination table having a small expected value of the degree of extension. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the designated game section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

7). Initial invention 7
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 6.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
Based on the winning combination in the role lottery means, it is possible to determine whether to extend the instruction game section,
When the first role (for example, small role E1) is won in the role lottery by the role lottery means, the extent of extension determined (the number of additions) than when the second role (for example, small role D) is won The expected value of
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), when the first combination is won, the extension of the instruction game section is based on the first combination winning. The degree is determined (step S541 in FIGS. 50 to 52),
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold, when the second combination is won, the degree of extension of the designated game section is determined based on the winning of the second combination,
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold value, when the first combination is won, the extent of extension of the instruction game section is determined in the same manner as when the second combination is won (FIG. 50). To Step S543 in FIG.
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 7 According to the original invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold, the extension of the designated game section is reduced so that the expected value of the degree of extension determined is reduced. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the designated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8). Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
In addition, an external signal indicating AT is output during the AT, and an external signal indicating the special game is output during the special game. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the on / off timing of the external signal from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the external signal indicating the designated game section and the external signal indicating the special game from being turned on / off unnaturally when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
Role lottery means (61) for drawing a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
An external signal transmission means (70),
Based on having won the special role in the role lottery means,
The external signal transmission means includes
When the instruction game section is started, the first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on. When the special game is finished, the second external signal is turned off.
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when it is in the designated game section and not in the special game, the first external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57),
When the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game ends (FIG. 57). Example 2)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
Provided with an advantageous section display device (favorable section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, the first external signal indicating the designated game section can be turned off at a natural timing even when the special game crosses the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. .

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
In addition, an external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT, but when the AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, there is a problem of how to control the external signal indicating the AT. It becomes.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control an external signal indicating the designated game section when the designated game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fourth embodiment; FIG. 58)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes external signal transmission means (70),
The external signal transmission means includes
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
The predetermined external signal is turned off when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the time when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached can be matched with the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
In addition, an external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT, but since the external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the time when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached are mixed, the external signal It is necessary to prevent the on / off timing from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent unnatural turning on / off of the external signal indicating the designated game section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the start and end of the special game, and the designated game section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
Role lottery means (61) for drawing a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
An external signal transmission means (70),
Based on having won the special role in the role lottery means,
The external signal transmission means includes
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57). ,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when it is in the designated game section and not in the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58),
When the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, when the special game is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, the time when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the end of the special game, and the timing for turning off the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section are matched. Can do.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed.
When such an advantageous section is provided, there is a problem as to when the AT starts and when the AT ends.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to enable a wide range of game design by giving the start and end triggers of the designated game section in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a))
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role,
As a lottery state (RT) in which the lottery is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (for example, RT5) and a second lottery state (for example, RT2) having different winning probabilities for at least one re-gamer are provided.
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instruction game section can be executed,
In the designated game section and the first lottery state, when the player enters the second lottery state because the predetermined condition is satisfied (50 games have been consumed), both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated. Features.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section and the designated game section can be started and ended with the transition of the lottery state. This allows a wide range of game design.

12 Initial invention 12
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 12 The same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
As a state controlled by the game control means, at least a first control state (a precursor, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal),
On the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the first control state (precursor),
In the first control state (AT), an instruction game section is started,
When the condition for transition to the second control state (normal) is satisfied in the advantageous section and the first control state (AT pull-back period, CZ, CZ pull-back period), the second control state is entered and the advantageous section is terminated. It is characterized by.
The second solving means is the first solving means,
In the first control state, which is the designated game section, when the condition for transition to the second control state is satisfied, the second control state is entered, and both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated. .

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section and the designated game section can be started and ended with the transition of the control state as a trigger. This allows a wide range of game design.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 13 Same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 and FIG. 61)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
As a gaming state controlled by the game control means (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)), at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
In the first gaming state (RT5 and AT), the advantageous section is executed and the instruction gaming section can be started,
When the designated game section is started in the first game state and the predetermined number of games has been consumed, the game state is shifted to the second game state (RT2 and normal) and the designated game section is ended.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
When the predetermined number of games has been consumed in the designated game section in the first game state, the second game state is entered, and both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be started or ended with the transition of the gaming state as a trigger. This allows a wide range of game design.

14 Initial invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
However, the playability that only ends when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not sufficient for differentiation from other models.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to execute a game that is not restricted by the upper limit of the advantageous section by enabling the advantageous section to be executed intermittently even if the advantageous section has an upper limit.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role,
As the lottery states in which the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means, the first lottery state (RT3), the second lottery state (RT6), and the third lottery state (for example, RT2) having different winning probabilities for at least one re-playing player )
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section Both sides,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (execute a lottery of “1/32”),
In the second lottery state normal section, when a specific condition for transitioning to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the “1/32” lottery is won), the transition is made to the advantageous section and transition to the advantageous section Based on the instruction game section can be started,
In the normal section in the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, it shifts to the advantageous section, but the designated game section is not started based on the transition to the advantageous section.

The second solving means (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role,
As the lottery states in which the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means, the first lottery state (RT3), the second lottery state (RT6), and the third lottery state (non-RT) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying player are different. )
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section Both sides,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (execute a lottery of “1/32”),
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games are consumed), the state shifts to the third lottery state,
There is a case of shifting to the third lottery state without going through the second lottery state,
Even in the normal section of the third lottery state that has shifted without going through the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section,
When it is decided to move to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, the instruction game section can be started thereafter,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without going through the second lottery state, the designated game section is not started.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the designated game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the designated game section, and then the advantageous game section is transferred again. Since it is possible and the instruction game section can be started, it is possible to execute a game that is not limited to the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding conditions that can start the designated game section (the first solution means satisfying a specific condition in the second lottery state, the second solution means going through the second lottery state), It can suppress that an instruction | indication game area becomes easy to be performed more than needed.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Further, it has been proposed to display to the player that the advantageous section is an advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where an advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role. In this case, it is desired not to lower the player's expectation during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of expectation even during special games.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (favorable section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probabilities for special roles are the same for all settings,
Based on winning the special role, you can start the advantageous section,
Based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has been stopped by winning the special role,
The advantageous section started based on winning the special role ends when the special game ends (Example 1 or 2 in FIG. 64) and continues after the special game ends (FIG. 65). Example 3)
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games regarding the continuation of an advantageous section during a special game.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The continuous effect is an effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the special game ends.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. Initial invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Further, it has been proposed to display to the player that the advantageous section is an advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where an advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role. In this case, it is desired not to lower the player's expectation even after the end of the special game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of expectation even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 16 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (favorable section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probabilities for special roles are the same for all settings,
Based on winning the special role, you can start the advantageous section,
Based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has been stopped by winning the special role,
An advantageous section started based on winning of a special role ends when a special game ends after a predetermined number of games (5 games) (example 4) and when the game continues beyond the predetermined number of games (example) 5)
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The predetermined effect is an effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue even after the end of the special game.

17. Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of the special role. In this case, the player's skill cannot be exhibited only by starting the advantageous section uniformly based on the winning of the special role.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make a difference in the profit related to the advantageous section depending on the skill of the player when the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the winning of the special role.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 17 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (9th embodiment (FIG. 67))
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case of a specific winning (1BBA + small part E1),
The specific win is a win that includes a special role (1BBA) that carries the win to the next game until the combination of symbols stops, and a predetermined role (small role E1) that does not carry the win to the next game,
The winning probability for a specific win is the same for all settings,
In the case where it is decided to move to an advantageous section in a game that has been won specially ("N" game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, and the winning of the special role is carried over to the next game The advantageous section is started from the game (“N + 2” game) in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination carrying over the winning can be stopped.

(C) Effect of the original invention 17 According to the initial invention, in the first game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role can be stopped, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the symbol corresponding to the special role It is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player whose combination has been stopped and the player who has not been able to stop the combination. Thereby, the profit obtained in an advantageous area can be varied according to the skill of the player.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 18 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, it is possible to perform the AT addition based on the winning of the special role having no setting difference, but it is possible to prevent the AT from being performed based on the winning of the special role having the setting difference. ing.
However, if this is done, there is a problem that when a special role with a setting difference is won during AT, the player cannot be given the expectation of adding AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to add an instruction game section (AT) even when a special combination having a setting difference is won.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (tenth embodiment (FIG. 22))
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section game (AT) in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so that a special part (for example, 1 BBA game) for winning a special game (for example, 1 BBA game) may be won.
Based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has been stopped by winning the special role,
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replaying role are provided,
In order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When transitioning to a special game based on winning a special role during the designated game section, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state after the special game ends. age,
In the designated game section, when the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is made without transitioning to the special game, the designated game section is not extended based on that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be extended when the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state on condition that a special game has been executed. . This makes it possible to extend the designated game section after the end of the special game, regardless of whether the selected special combination has a setting difference. Furthermore, it is possible to set the designated game section not to be extended only by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without passing through the special game.

19. Original invention 19
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 19 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is desired to provide a new game using the instruction function operation game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to provide a new game using the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 19 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section game (AT) in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined part (small part E1) is won,
The winning probability for a given role is the same for all settings,
When winning a predetermined role in the role lottery by the role lottery means, the next game shifts to an advantageous section,
An advantageous section that shifts based on the winning of the specified role is
A first advantageous section (Example 1 in FIG. 68) that executes at least one instruction function operation game but does not execute the instruction game section;
A second advantageous section (Example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the designated game section;
The production control means outputs a continuous production in an advantageous section that has been shifted based on the winning of a predetermined combination.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The production control means starts the continuous production after one instruction function operation game is executed.
The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
The continuous effect is an effect suggesting whether it is the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the original invention 19 According to the initial invention, even when a transition is made to the advantageous section, the instruction game section is executed, and at least one instruction function operation game is executed but the instruction game section is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gameability from shifting to the advantageous section / not shifting.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 20 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to provide an upper limit for the advantageous section. On the other hand, even if it shifts to the advantageous section, it is conceivable that the condition device (combination) having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to balance the end condition (including the upper limit) of the advantageous section and the execution of the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (11th embodiment; FIG. 69)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined part (small part E1) is won,
The winning probability for a given role is the same for all settings,
When winning a predetermined role in the role lottery by the role lottery means, there may be a transition to an advantageous section from the next game,
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, if there is no game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the predetermined end condition is reached, the advantageous section is terminated until at least one instruction function operation game is executed. Although not (Example 3 in FIG. 69), if there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, it is advantageous without executing the instruction function operation game. End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, in the advantageous section, “at least one instruction function operation game is executed” and “when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated”. Can be balanced.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 21 The first invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit for the advantageous section. Furthermore, it is possible to win a special role during the advantageous section and shift to a special game. In this case, if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that time, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during execution of the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (Twelfth Embodiment; FIG. 70)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so that a special part (for example, 1 BBA game) for winning a special game (for example, 1 BBA game) may be won.
The production control means includes
When a certain condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous effect is ended and the specific effect is ended.
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect and the game shifts to a special game, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is ended, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is ended.

(C) Effect of the original invention 21 According to the original invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is ended, but the special section is output until the special game is ended. Continue the specific production. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from suddenly ending during the special game, and not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

22. Initial invention 22
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 22 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having a plurality of lottery states with different winning probabilities of at least one re-game player.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine that shifts RT (lottery state) in order to execute AT is known.
In the prior art, it is known that RT transition is performed, for example, by winning a specific condition device and stopping a specific symbol combination. However, there is a problem that the ease of transition of RT may differ depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the RT transition from being affected by the set value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 22 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
As the lottery states in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means, the first lottery state (RT2), the second lottery state (RT3), and the third lottery state (RT4) having different winning probabilities for at least one replaying role are selected. Prepared,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so that there is a case where a specific role (replay group B) is won,
When the specified combination is won in the first lottery state and the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The winning probabilities of specific roles in the first lottery state are the same for all set values,
The role lottery means draws a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (for example, 1BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBB game),
If a special combination is won in any lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination does not stop, the system shifts to the third lottery state.
The special role winning probability varies depending on the set value.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, or an instruction game section (AT) with a high execution frequency is provided, and
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When a special role is won during the designated game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state in order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game.
After the special game is over, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
The designated game section can be executed in the third lottery state,
When the designated game section is in the third lottery state, the designated game section is not extended.

(C) Effect of the original invention 22 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of the specific role that becomes the trigger for the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all the set values. The ease of transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Initial invention 23
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 23 Same as the original invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 23 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section game (AT) in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replaying role are provided,
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case where a specific re-playing part (replay C group) is won in the second lottery state,
In the second lottery state, when a specific re-game player is won and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the first lottery state,
The winning probability of a particular re-gamer in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the second lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined re-playing combination (Replay A) is won,
Even if the predetermined re-gamer is won in the second lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer is stopped, the first lottery state is not shifted,
The winning probability of the predetermined re-gamer in the second lottery state is different according to a set value.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, the winning probabilities of a specific re-gamer that triggers the transition to the lottery state are the same for all the set values. It is possible to avoid being affected by. Furthermore, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of a predetermined re-gamer who does not trigger the lottery state transition is made different according to the set value. can do.

24. Initial invention 24
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 24 The same as the original invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 24 (Note that the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
As a lottery state in which a role lottery is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (RT2) having different winning probabilities of at least one replaying role are provided,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first lottery state, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of the role so as to have a case of winning the first role (small role B group) having the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the first combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of the role so as to have a case of winning the second role (small role D) that does not have the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the second combination in the first lottery state varies depending on the set value,
The role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of the role so as to have a case of winning the third role (small role E1) that does not have the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the third combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first combination is stopped is D1 (9 sheets), the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second combination is stopped is D2 (15 sheets), and the third combination is When the maximum payout when the corresponding symbol combination stops is D3 (2),
D2>D1> D3
It is characterized by satisfying.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, it has an advantageous section that can execute the instruction function operation game,
When a third combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means during a normal section, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, since the winning probabilities of the first combination having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state are the same in all set values, the first lottery state It is possible to prevent the setting value from affecting the ease of transition from the first to the second lottery state.
Further, since the winning probability of the second combination having the highest payout is made different according to the set value, the payout rate can be changed greatly according to the set value.

25. Original invention 25
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 25 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to change the end condition of the advantageous section after starting the advantageous section. Further, it is considered necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at an intended timing while making it possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 72)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
An advantageous section in which at least one instruction function operation game needs to be executed among the game sections,
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section
When a predetermined condition (extended section extension condition) is satisfied during the advantageous section, the end condition (30 games) of the advantageous section until then is changed (50 games are added),
After the execution of at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, when the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on satisfying the predetermined condition, the instruction function operation game is set to 1 after the end condition is changed. The advantageous section can be ended without executing it again (example 1 in FIG. 72),
If the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied before the first instruction function operation game is executed after the transition to the advantageous section, at least once after the end condition is changed. If the instruction function operation game is not executed, the advantageous section cannot be ended even if the end condition is satisfied (example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effects of the original invention 25 According to the initial invention, after the advantageous section is started, the end condition of the advantageous section until then can be changed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, it is possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section, and at the timing when the advantageous section is intended because the instruction function operation game has not been executed even though the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the termination.

26. Initial invention 26
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 26 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to perform a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, even if the freezing is executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute the freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 26 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, it has an advantageous section that can execute the instruction function operation game,
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section
There are at least two types of first end condition and second end condition as the end condition of the advantageous section,
The advantage interval of the first end condition has a larger expected value of profits obtained during the advantage interval than the advantage interval of the second end condition,
Freeze control means for controlling the freeze to temporarily stop the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section with the second ending condition (CZ ending condition), and freezes when ending the advantageous section with the first ending condition (AT ending condition). It is characterized by being executed.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
During the freeze, a display relating to profits obtained during the advantageous section is performed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, when freezing is executed according to the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By providing the case where the freeze is not executed (when the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous section.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Base part 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Substrate case 16a Caulking part 17 Display window 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 reel sensor 35 hopper 36 hopper motor 37 payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 medal slot 43a passage sensor 44 insertion sensor 45 blocker 46 settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) main control board ( Main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 69a Advantageous section counter 69b Upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentration terminal board 200 Hall computer

The present invention relates to a slot machine comprising advantageously interval (second interval) that can operate in instruction function of instructing the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.

Recently, it has been proposed to provide a beneficial section can operate in instruction function for instructing the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (second section). Here, it is conceivable to perform a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, even if the advantageous section ends while the game is continued in the special game state, if the freeze is executed uniformly , the game in the special game state is hindered, which is not preferable.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to prevent the freeze from interfering with the game in the special game state when the freeze can be executed at the end of the advantageous section (second section) .

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The invention of claim 1
In a game where winning lottery result is a specific result (small combination group B winning), the instructing function for instructing the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (correct press order),
Among the game section, even game became result of said identification, a first section can not operate the indicating function (ordinary period),
Among the game section, the gaming became result of said identification, and a second section that can operate the indicating function (advantageously section),
Game control means (advantageous section control means 69) for controlling the start and end of the second section,
The game control means includes
In the first section, when the start condition of the second section is satisfied, the second section can be started,
After starting the second section, when it is determined that the game of the specific number of times (1500 game) in the second period is performed, with ends of the second section, you can execute the freeze upon completion of the second section Yes,
Based on the special symbol combination (“Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”) being stopped and displayed, the special gaming state (1BB game) is started.
After the second section is started, if the game determined that the specific number of games have been executed in the second section is a predetermined game in the special game state, the freeze is not executed when the second section is ended. It is characterized by.

According to the present invention, when the game in which the second section (advantageous section) ends is a predetermined game in the special game state, the freeze is not executed, so that the game in the special game state is not hindered. Can do.

Claims (2)

A game having an advantageous mode of operation of a stop switch;
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, it has an advantageous section that can execute the instruction function operation game,
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section
There are at least two types of first end condition and second end condition as the end condition of the advantageous section,
The advantage interval of the first end condition has a larger expected value of profits obtained during the advantage interval than the advantage interval of the second end condition,
Freeze control means for controlling the freeze to temporarily stop the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute freeze when ending an advantageous section under the second end condition, and executes freeze when ending the advantageous section under the first end condition. In claim 1,
A slot machine that displays information related to profits obtained during an advantageous section during the freeze.

Images